®

Nexus SimDataStudio™ User

Guide
© 2008 Landmark Graphics Corporation

R5000.0.1
© 2008 Landmark Graphics Corporation
All Rights Reserved Worldwide

This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also
protected by Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:

Landmark Graphics Corporation

2107 CityWest Blvd, Building 2, Houston, Texas 77042-3051, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone:713-839-2000
FAX: 713-839-2015
Internet: www.halliburton.com/landmark

Trademark Notice
3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3DFS, 3D Surveillance, 3DView, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir
Surveillance, ADC, Advanced Data Transfer, ARIES, ARIES DecisionSuite, AssetConnect, Asset Decision
Solutions, Asset Development Center, AssetDirector, Asset Journal, AssetLink, AssetLink Advisor, AssetLink
Director, AssetLink Observer, AssetObserver, AssetObserver Advisor, Asset Performance, AssetPlanner,
AssetSolver, AssetSolver Online, AssetView, BLITZPAK, CasingLife, CasingSeat, COMPASS, Corporate Data
Archiver, Corporate Data Store, Data Analyzer, DataManager, DataStar, DBPlot, Decision Management System,
DecisionSpace, DecisionsSpace 3D Drill View KM, DecisionSpace AssetLink, DecisionSpace AssetPlanner,
DecisionSpace AssetSolver, DecisionSpace AssetView 2D, DecisionSpace AssetView 3D, DecisionSpace Atomic
Meshing, DecisionSpace Decision Management Systems(DMS), DecisionSpace for Production, DecisionSpace
Infrastructure, DecisionSpace Nexus, DecisionSpace PowerModel, DecisionSpace PrecisionTarget, DecisionSpace
Reservoir, DecisionSpace TracPlanner, DecisionSpace Well Seismic Fusion, DecisionSpace WellSolver,
DecisionSuite, DepthTeam, Depth Team, DepthTeam Explorer, Depth Team Explorer, DepthTeam Express, Depth
Team Express, DepthTeam Extreme, Depth Team Extreme, DepthTeam Interpreter, Depth Team Interpreter, Desktop
Navigator, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DIMS, Discovery, Discovery Asset, Discovery FrameBuilder,
DMS, Drillability Suite, Drilling Desktop, DrillModel, Drill-to-the-Earth Model, Drillworks, Drillworks
ConnectML, DSS, Dynamic Reservoir Management, Dynamic Surveillance System, EarthCube, EDM, EDT,
eLandmark, Engineer’s Data Model, Engineer's Desktop, Engineer’s Link, ESP, Event Similarity Prediction, ezFault,
ezModel, ezSurface, ezTracker, FastTrack, FG+, FieldPlan, Field Scenario Planner, FZAP!, GeoAtlas, GeoDataLoad,
GeoGraphix, GeoGraphix Exploration System, GeoLink, GeoProbe GF DataServer, GES, GES97, GESXplorer,
GMAplus, GMI Imager, GRIDGENR, Handheld Field Operator, HHFO, I2 Enterprise, iDIMS, IsoMap, iWellFile, i
Wellfile, KnowledgeSource, Landmark, Landmark Decision Center, Landmark & Design, Landmark Logo and
Design, Landscape, Lattix, LeaseMap, LMK Resources, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep, Make Great Decisions,
MathPack, MIMIC, MIMIC+, Model Builder, MyLandmark, Nexus, Object MP, OpenBooks, OpenJournal,
OpenSGM, OpenVision, OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWorks, OpenWorks Development Kit, OpenWorks Well File,
OpenWorks Production, PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroBank, PetroBank Explorer, PetroBank Master Data Store,
PetroWorks, PetroWorks Asset, PetroWorks Pro, PetroWorks ULTRA, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus, Pointing
Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP, PostStack Family, PowerCalculator, PowerExplorer, PowerExplorer Connect,
PowerGrid, PowerHub, Power Interpretation, PowerJournal, PowerModel, PowerView, PrecisionTarget, Presgraf,
Pressworks, PRIZM, Production Asset Manager, Production, PROFILE, Project Administrator, ProMAGIC,
ProMAGIC Connect, ProMAGIC Server, ProMAX, ProMAX 2D, ProMAX 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX 4D,
ProMAX Family, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx, Query Builder, Quick, Quick+, QUICKDIF, QuickWell,
QuickWell+, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE, RAYMAP, RAYMAP+, Real Freedom, Real Time Asset
Management Center, Real Time Decision Center, Real Time Operations Center, Real Time Production Surveillance,
Real Time Surveillance, Real-Time View, Reference Data Manager, Reservoir Framework Builder, RESev, ResMap,
RightTime, RTOC, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisSpace, SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisWorks
2D, SeisWorks 3D, SeisWorks PowerCalculator, SeisWorks PowerJournal, SeisWorks PowerSection, SeisWorks
PowerView, SeisXchange, Semblance Computation and Analysis, Sierra Family, SigmaView, SimConnect,
SimConvert, SimDataStudio, SimResults, SimResults+, SimResults+3D, SIVA+, SLAM, smartSECTION,
Spatializer, SpecDecomp, StrataAmp, StrataMap, StrataModel, StrataSim, StrataWorks, StratWorks, StratWorks 3D,
StreamCalc, StressCheck, STRUCT, Structure Cube, Surf & Connect, SynTool, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients,
SystemStart for Servers, System Start for Servers, SystemStart for Storage, Tanks & Tubes, TDQ, Team Workspace,
TERAS, The Engineer’s Desktop, Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs, TOW/cs Revenue Interface, TracPlanner,
TracPlanner Xpress, Trend Form Gridding, Turbo Synthetics, VESPA, VESPA+, VIP, VIP-COMP, VIP-CORE,
VIPDataStudio, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement, VIP-THERM, WavX,
Web Editor, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, Wellbore Planner Connect, WELLCAT, Well Cost, WELLPLAN, Well
Seismic Fusion, WellSolver, WellXchange, WOW, Xsection, You're in Control. Experience the difference, ZAP!, and
Z-MAP Plus are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of Landmark Graphics Corporation.

All other trademarks, service marks and product or service names are the trademarks or names of their respective
owners.
Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied
warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

Landmark acknowledges that certain third party code has been bundled with, or embedded in, Landmark’s software.
The licensors of this third party code, and the terms and conditions of their respective licenses, may be found at the
following location:

..\Nexus-VIP5000.0.1\help\com\lgc\dspx\ThirdParty.pdf
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Table of Contents

Overview .............................................................................................................................. 13
What is SimDataStudio™? ................................................................................................. 13
Initialization Data ............................................................................................................... 14
Recurrent Data .................................................................................................................... 15

Basic Operations ............................................................................................................ 17

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 17
Working with Case Files..................................................................................................... 18
Opening a New Case .................................................................................................... 19
Using the Assistant to Create a Simple Dataset ..................................................... 21
Create a New Case by Parsing an Existing VIP Data Set ...................................... 23
Opening an Existing Case ............................................................................................ 24
Saving and Closing the Current Case .......................................................................... 24
Working with Simulation Data Files .................................................................................. 25
Creating a New Simulation File ................................................................................... 25
Opening an Existing Data File ..................................................................................... 26
Saving the Data File ..................................................................................................... 27
Closing the Current Data File ...................................................................................... 28
Customizing the View ........................................................................................................ 29
Changing the Location of Toolbars ............................................................................. 29
Controlling the Display of Toolbars and Status Bar .................................................... 30
Customizing the Toolbars ............................................................................................ 31
Creating a New Toolbar ............................................................................................... 33
Resetting or Deleting Toolbars .................................................................................... 35

Setting User Preferences ........................................................................................... 37

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 37
Setting Preferences for Dates - Units - Formats .......................................................... 38
Setting the Default Color and Chart Options ............................................................... 40
Setting the Default Reservoir Model Type .................................................................. 42
Observed Data .............................................................................................................. 44
Setting the VIP® Data File Generation ........................................................................ 46
Setting the Parsing Options .......................................................................................... 49
Setting the Nexus® Case (Initialization) Generation Options ..................................... 53
Setting the Nexus Recurrent Data Options .................................................................. 56
Setting the ECLIPSE™ Import Options ...................................................................... 58

R5000.0.1 v
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Defining Initialization Utility Data .......................................................................... 59

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 59
Unit Grid System ................................................................................................................ 60
General Information ..................................................................................................... 60
Grid System ................................................................................................................. 61
Specify GRIDGENR Files ..................................................................................... 62
Define Simple Grid ................................................................................................ 63
Use Grid from VDB ............................................................................................... 63
Local Grid Refinements ......................................................................................... 64
Exclude or Add gridblocks to LGR ....................................................................... 69
Grid Decomposition for Parallel Submission ........................................................ 70
Fluid Model......................................................................................................................... 72
Output and Region Data ..................................................................................................... 76
Results Files Control (Map Output) ............................................................................. 76
Print Options ................................................................................................................ 79
Individual Group Print Controls ............................................................................ 81
Print Format ........................................................................................................... 82
Regions Definition ....................................................................................................... 83
Fluid Reservoir Constants................................................................................................... 85
Water Properties .......................................................................................................... 86
Reservoir Constants ..................................................................................................... 86
Standard conditions ...................................................................................................... 87
Dimension Data .................................................................................................................. 88
Reservoir Model ................................................................................................................. 89
Initialization Options .......................................................................................................... 91
Initialization Type ........................................................................................................ 91
Initialization Algorithm ............................................................................................... 92
Vertical Equilibrium .................................................................................................... 94
Grid Input Options .............................................................................................................. 95
Offband Connections ................................................................................................... 95
Tolerance for Individual Grids .................................................................................... 97
Pore Volume and Transmissibility Calculations ......................................................... 99
Cornerpoint Options .................................................................................................... 100
EOS-PVT Options .............................................................................................................. 102

Initialization Data ............................................................................................................ 105

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 105
Initial PVT Conditions........................................................................................................ 106
Phase Contact...................................................................................................................... 107
Initial Saturation Pressure ................................................................................................... 108
Constants ................................................................................................................ 108
Varying by Depth ................................................................................................... 110
Initial Salinity ........................................................................................................ 111
Region Management ........................................................................................................... 113
Add Region Pane ......................................................................................................... 113

vi R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Add/Edit Region Description and Comments ............................................................. 113

Select Region Pane ...................................................................................................... 114
Delete Region Pane ...................................................................................................... 115

Defining Table Data ...................................................................................................... 117

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 117
General Tasks ..................................................................................................................... 118
Building Tables ............................................................................................................ 118
Defining Tables ............................................................................................................ 118
Importing Tables .......................................................................................................... 119
View and Edit Tables ................................................................................................... 120
Rock Property Tables.......................................................................................................... 122
Water-Oil Table ........................................................................................................... 123
Creating a Water-Oil Table Using a Corey Model ................................................ 123
Gas-Oil Table (Gas-Oil Fluid Model) ......................................................................... 124
Creating a Gas-Oil Table Using a Corey Model .................................................... 124
Advanced Reservoir Model Tables .............................................................................. 126
Relative Permeability Tables .............................................................................................. 127
Fluid Property Tables.......................................................................................................... 129
PVT Table Definitions ................................................................................................. 130
Water PVT ............................................................................................................. 130
Salinity Tracking .................................................................................................... 131
Differential Expansion Tables ............................................................................... 131
Define Surface Density ................................................................................................ 134
Define Undersaturated Data ......................................................................................... 135
EOS Data Tables (Compositional Models) ................................................................. 137
Reservoir EOS ....................................................................................................... 137
Other Parameters .................................................................................................... 141
Separator EOS ........................................................................................................ 141
Define Separator Batteries (K-Values Models and Compositional Models Only) ...... 142

Defining Grid Array Data ............................................................................................ 145

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 145
Array Panel ......................................................................................................................... 146
Use the Roadmap ......................................................................................................... 146
Import Arrays ............................................................................................................... 146
Define Arrays ............................................................................................................... 148
Define Constant Array ........................................................................................... 148
Define Multiple ...................................................................................................... 148
Define Variable ...................................................................................................... 149
Overview of Array Data ..................................................................................................... 150
Definition Arrays ......................................................................................................... 150
Physical Properties ....................................................................................................... 151
Other Arrays ................................................................................................................ 153

R5000.0.1 vii
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Advanced Reservoir Model Arrays ............................................................................. 154

Functions for Array Definition ........................................................................................... 155
Function Management and Selection ........................................................................... 156
Add or Delete a Function ....................................................................................... 156
Rename a Function ................................................................................................ 156
Select a Function .................................................................................................... 157
Define the Function ..................................................................................................... 157
Analytical ............................................................................................................... 157
Interpolation ........................................................................................................... 160
Volume Averaged (Cartesian Grids Only) ............................................................ 162
Define Range ............................................................................................................... 163
Gridblock Range .................................................................................................... 163
Value Range ........................................................................................................... 164
Grid Coarsening .................................................................................................................. 167

Well Management Level Data................................................................................... 169

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 169
Add, Delete, or Rename Components ................................................................................ 170
Assign Targets and Rates ............................................................................................. 171
Global Gaslift Options and Optimization Tables ............................................................... 174
Gaslift Global Options ................................................................................................. 174
Ontime Treatment for Gas Lift .............................................................................. 176
Optimal GLR Tables .................................................................................................... 177
Injection Regions ................................................................................................................ 178
Gas Cycling......................................................................................................................... 179
Targeting Options ............................................................................................................... 180
Target Management ..................................................................................................... 181
Import a File ........................................................................................................... 181
Define a Target ...................................................................................................... 181
Connections List Management .............................................................................. 187
Guide Rate Management ............................................................................................. 189
Target Value Plot ......................................................................................................... 189
Procedure Definition........................................................................................................... 190
Drill Queue ......................................................................................................................... 191

Multipliers - Overrides ................................................................................................. 193

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 193
Data Management and Selection ................................................................................. 193
Add an Array Name and Range ............................................................................. 193
Delete Array Name and Range .............................................................................. 193
Move between Lines .............................................................................................. 193
Connections Transmissibility Modification........................................................................ 194
Procedures .............................................................................................................. 194
Transmissibility/Pore Volume Modifications..................................................................... 197

viii R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Procedures .............................................................................................................. 198

Half-Transmissibilities........................................................................................................ 200
Procedures .............................................................................................................. 201
Arbitrary Gridblock Connections ....................................................................................... 202
Procedures .............................................................................................................. 202
Inter/Intra Gridblock Region Transmissibility Multipliers................................................. 204
Procedures .............................................................................................................. 205
Named Fault Multipliers ..................................................................................................... 206
Procedures .................................................................................................................... 207

Defining Aquifer Data ................................................................................................... 209

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 209
Create Multiple Aquifers .................................................................................................... 211
Define Carter-Tracey Aquifer............................................................................................. 212
Define Fetkovich Aquifer ................................................................................................... 215
Aquifer Connection to Reservoir Grid................................................................................ 217

Working with Production Data ................................................................................ 219

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 219
Importing Production Data ................................................................................................. 221
Openworks Data .......................................................................................................... 221
Active Field Surveillance (AFS) Data ......................................................................... 227
Adjusting the Start Date ............................................................................................... 238
Import File Examples ................................................................................................... 239
Examples of Appending Production Data to a Case with Production Data ........... 246
Reviewing and Editing the Worksheet ............................................................................... 250
Viewing Production Data by Well Hierarchy .............................................................. 250
Changing the Worksheet .............................................................................................. 252
Changing Column Widths ........................................................................................... 253
Hiding Columns ........................................................................................................... 253
Changing the Display Format ...................................................................................... 254
Reviewing and Editing the Charts ...................................................................................... 256
Zooming In and Out ..................................................................................................... 256
Changing a Plotted Value ............................................................................................ 257
Inserting/Removing Charts .......................................................................................... 257
Changing the Chart Properties ..................................................................................... 258
Searching for Inconsistent Data .......................................................................................... 260
Manual Search for Switchovers ................................................................................... 261
Automatic Search for Switchovers .............................................................................. 262
Averaging the Data ............................................................................................................. 263
Setting Up and Performing the Averaging .................................................................. 264
Interactively Adjusting Averaged Data ....................................................................... 267
Generate Types and Constraints ......................................................................................... 268
Clearing the Worksheet ...................................................................................................... 274

R5000.0.1 ix
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Defining Simulation Utility Data ............................................................................ 275

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 275

Defining Output Options ............................................................................................ 277

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 277
Viewing the Output Options Worksheet............................................................................. 278
Setting Up the Date List...................................................................................................... 280
Changing the Date List ....................................................................................................... 286
Adding a Date Record .................................................................................................. 286
Adding or Changing the Selected Options in a Cell .................................................... 287
Changing the Restart Dates .......................................................................................... 289
Changing the Output Frequency .................................................................................. 289
Clearing the Worksheet ...................................................................................................... 291

Working with Well Data ............................................................................................... 293

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 293
Viewing the Well Names and Locations Worksheet .......................................................... 295
Setting Up the Well List ..................................................................................................... 297
Displaying Common Well IDs ........................................................................................... 299
Changing the Well List ....................................................................................................... 300
Changing the Effective Date or Other Cells ................................................................ 300
Sorting the Worksheet ................................................................................................. 300
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Cells ............................................................................. 300
Inserting a New Well ................................................................................................... 301
Deleting Individual Wells ............................................................................................ 302
Deleting Multiple Wells ............................................................................................... 303
Clearing the Worksheet ...................................................................................................... 304
Viewing the Perforations Worksheet .................................................................................. 305
Setting Up the Well Perforation List .................................................................................. 306
Importing from an FPF File ......................................................................................... 308
Importing using the Perforation Wizard ...................................................................... 309
ASCII file format to import Well Perf Data .......................................................... 317
Importing from an ASCII File ..................................................................................... 321
Perforation Data Import Results .................................................................................. 322
Changing the Perforation List............................................................................................. 324
Changing the Effective Date or Other Data ................................................................. 324
Sorting the Worksheet ................................................................................................. 324
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Cells ............................................................................. 324
Adding or Removing Columns in the Worksheet ........................................................ 325
Inserting a New Perforation Record ............................................................................ 326
Adding a Perforation to an Existing Well .................................................................... 327
Deleting Well Perforation Records .............................................................................. 328
Deleting Layer Perforations ......................................................................................... 329
Clearing the Worksheet ............................................................................................... 330

x R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Defining Recompletion Units ............................................................................................. 331

Viewing/Editing Well Constraints...................................................................................... 332
Well Type Color Code ................................................................................................. 333
View Mode Selection ................................................................................................... 333
Setting Constraints ....................................................................................................... 334
Definitions ............................................................................................................. 334
Procedures .............................................................................................................. 336
Global Options .................................................................................................................... 346

Surface and Interconnect Network ....................................................................... 349

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 349
Define Network Nodes ....................................................................................................... 350
Import Network File .................................................................................................... 351
Create or Modify Interconnect Network ...................................................................... 352
Setting Gaslift Options ........................................................................................... 355
Define Network Properties and Constraints ....................................................................... 358
Default Connection Data ............................................................................................. 364
Non-Wells, Bottomhole-to- Well, and Well-to-Network ...................................... 365
Wellbore ................................................................................................................. 365
Datum Correction .................................................................................................. 365
Crossflow ............................................................................................................... 366
Heat Transfer / Temperature Adjustment Options ................................................ 366
PVT and Hydraulics Data ................................................................................................... 367
Import ........................................................................................................................... 368
Create a Correlation Curve .......................................................................................... 369
Preview/Edit the Data from a Plot ............................................................................... 370
Simulation Controls ..................................................................................................... 371
Valve and Choke Data ........................................................................................................ 375
Import Valve and Choke Definitions ..................................................................... 375
Define Multiple Settings ........................................................................................ 376
Define the Valve or Choke Method ....................................................................... 376
Valve Trigger Data ............................................................................................................. 378

Time-Dependent Grid Data ........................................................................................ 381

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 381
Data Management and Selection ................................................................................. 381
Add an Array Name and Range ............................................................................. 381
Delete Array Name and Range .............................................................................. 381
Move between Lines .............................................................................................. 381
Input Array Modification.................................................................................................... 382
Procedures .............................................................................................................. 382
Arbitrary Gridblock Connections ....................................................................................... 384
Procedures .............................................................................................................. 384
Inter/Intra Gridblock Region Transmissibility Multipliers................................................. 386

R5000.0.1 xi
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Procedures .............................................................................................................. 387

Named Fault Multipliers ..................................................................................................... 388
Procedures .................................................................................................................... 389
Interface Pressure Threshold .............................................................................................. 390
Procedures .................................................................................................................... 390

Simulation Control ......................................................................................................... 393

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 393
Procedures........................................................................................................................... 394
Define Timestep Method ....................................................................................... 394
Define Controls ...................................................................................................... 395

Defining External Include Data for Network and Control Options...... 397
Introduction......................................................................................................................... 397
Include Files........................................................................................................................ 399
External Data ...................................................................................................................... 401

Index ...................................................................................................................................... 403

xii R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Overview

What is SimDataStudio™?

The SimDataStudio software automates the creation of the initialization

and recurrent data files that are submitted to the reservoir simulator.

The output files created by the SimDataStudio software are in the ASCII
keyword/option format used by the simulator. The SimDataStudio
software lets you enter data within a context-driven interface and
automatically translates the information into the required format. As you
enter data, the interface dynamically changes to reflect data-dependent
options. The application also traps for and identifies some basic input
errors so you can correct them before you begin the simulation.

The SimDataStudio software includes the most common simulation

options. However, it does not include all the specialized options. It
provides file selection options and an Include File panel through which
you can add include files or enter advanced keyword options. Or you can
use a text editor to modify the initialization and recurrent data files
output by the SimDataStudio software to include additional keyword
options. A complete list of keyword options is provided in the Nexus®
Keyword Document.

R5000.0.1 Overview: What is SimDataStudio™? 13

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Initialization Data

Initialization contains the data needed to define the initial reservoir

model. The required data is listed below:

• Utility Data, including simulation start date, grid size and number
of components, and physical property constants.

• Tabular Data, including equilibrium table, relative permeability/

capillary pressure table, and black-oil phase behavior table.

• Array Data, including gridblock dimensions or cornerpoints,

porosity/pore volume arrays, and permeability/transmissibility
arrays by grid definition and properties.

14 Overview: Initialization Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Recurrent Data

Recurrent data contains the data needed to take the initialized model
and move it forward in time, calculating migration of fluids through the
reservoir and production or injection flow at wells. It contains the data
needed to accurately describe the time-dependent characteristics of the
reservoir.

• Recurrent data, including a definition of each well that is active

in the simulation, specific days during the simulation at which key
events occur (e.g., output reported, wells added, flow rate change,
etc.). Recurrent data also includes surface network data.

• Output data, including the content and frequency of output files.

• Multi-reservoir data, including interconnect networks,

constraints, and PVT and hydraulic tables.

The SimDataStudio software lets you import and edit well production
history data, well name/location data, and well perforation data for use
in your reservoir model. It also lets you generate certain types of data
automatically from production data, such as a list of well and network
constraints to be applied on specific days during the simulation.

R5000.0.1 Overview: Recurrent Data 15

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

16 Overview: Recurrent Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Basic Operations

Introduction
There are several basic operations on the File and View menu that you
should understand before getting started, including:

• Knowing the difference between case files and data files

• Creating, opening, saving and closing case files (including using

the wizard to create a case)

• Opening, saving and closing data files

• Setting the toolbar display

• Setting the user options

• Printing data

This chapter explains how to perform each of the operations listed

above.

R5000.0.1 Basic Operations: Introduction 17

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Working with Case Files

The Nexus® software organizes the simulation process around the
concept of a “case study.” You open a “study” and then open a series of
“cases” within that study. All data being prepared for use in a particular
simulation are typically saved as a “case” in the database file for that
study (studyname.vdb).

The same is true with the SimDataStudio™ software. However, the

SimDataStudio software sets up its own unique case file (using a file
extension of .vds) that differs from the case information stored in the
.vdb. Specifically, SimDataStudio case files contain all the data you
have compiled during a particular work session within the
SimDataStudio software. This case file is used so that you can easily
save a work session and retrieve it within the SimDataStudio software.

When you select the SimDataStudio software from the Nexus main
window, you must have selected a study and case. When you are
finished working with a case and save it, the SimDataStudio software
saves its own case file using the borrowed case name (e.g., case3.vds).
You can reopen that case file at any time when you want to resume a
work session.

Within the SimDataStudio software you can:

• open a new case file with your own preferred case name

• open an existing VDS case file created previously

• select from a menu of recently-opened cases

You can work on the case file, and then save it using the current name
or any other name you want to save it as. The following procedures
explain how to open, close and save case files in the SimDataStudio
software.

18 Basic Operations: Working with Case Files R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Opening a New Case

Perform the following steps to define a completely new case in the
SimDataStudio software.

1. Open the dialog box. Select File > New Case on the
SimDataStudio menu bar, or press Ctrl-N. This opens the New
Case dialog box.

Folder where
new file will
File names be saved
to use

Creation Mode
Options

2. Change directory if necessary. The current directory is shown in

the Location field. Click the next to the Location field to
open the Selection dialog box. Filter to the directory and click the
OK button to close the dialog box.

3. Enter case name. Type the case name in the Case Name entry
field. As you type the name, the simulation and well file names are
also created.

4. Select creation mode option. The default is to create an empty

Nexus case. Click to activate the toggle to:

• Create an empty SimDataStudio data set.

• Use the assistant to create a simple Nexus data set
• Create an empty Nexus multireservoir case
• Use the assistant to create a Nexus multireservoir case (with
existing Nexus cases)
• Create a new case from an existing VIP® case.

R5000.0.1 Basic Operations: Working with Case Files 19

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

These options are described below.

Case Creation Output Data Description

Mode Type
Create an empty VIP or Nexus Opens a SimDataStudio case (.vds). The
SimDataStudio case can be populated manually with either
case. VIP or Nexus data.
To create a Nexus data set, toggle the
Nexus Case option on.
Use assistant to VIP or Nexus Opens a new SimDataStudio case (.vds)
create a simple and populates it with the relevant data from
initialization data an existing case. For example, if you have
set. specified that the new case should derive
grid data from an existing .vdb, the grid
data will be imported.
The existing case can be either a VIP case
(i.dat, r.dat) or a Nexus case (.fcs).
To create a Nexus data set, toggle the
Nexus Case option on.
Create an empty Nexus only Opens a new SimDataStudio case (.vds)
Nexus and well database (.wdb). The case can
multireservoir only contain data that will be valid for a
case. Nexus multireservoir case (.fcs).
Use assistant to Nexus only Opens a new SimDataStudio case (.vds)
create a Nexus and populates it with the relevant data from
multireservoir two or more Nexus cases. The
case. SimDataStudio case can only contain data
that will be valid for a Nexus
multireservoir case (.fcs).
Create a new VIP or Nexus Opens a new SimDataStudio case (.vds)
case by parsing and populates it with data from an existing
an existing VIP VIP case. The SimDataStudio case can
data set. then be used to generate either a VIP or a
Nexus case, or both.

5. Save the Case. Click the OK button to create and open the new
case. Notice that your new case name now appears on the title bar
at the top of the SimDataStudio main window.

20 Basic Operations: Working with Case Files R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Using the Assistant to Create a Simple Dataset

The assistant (wizard) steps you through the series of panels that
contain mandatory data for a basic initialization file. It provides all the
error checking that is available from the Options Tree panels. You enter
the following data.

• Grid data

• Grid definition, porosity, and permeability arrays

• Basic water and rock properties
• Water-oil and gas-oil tables
• Fluid model
• Output, equilibrium, PVT, and rock type regions
• Rock and fluid table correlation data (with preview button)
• PVT Data
• Equilibrium data

Perform the following steps to create a basic initialization data set

using the wizard:

1. Select the option. Activate the Use Assistant to Create a Simple

Initialization Data Set toggle on the dialog box as shown below.
The Wizard opens.

Activate Wizard toggle

R5000.0.1 Basic Operations: Working with Case Files 21

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

2. Open the assistant. Enter the new case name and grid data. Click
the OK button to open the assistant as shown below.

Next button activates when all data

is present and meets error-checks

3. Enter the data. Complete each panel. Click the Back button at any
time to return to a previous panel Click the Next button to move
between panels. The Next button will be inactive until all required
data has been entered and meets error-checking rules.

4. View the summary. This message box provides a summary of the

data you entered. If desired, toggle on the Structured Grid Input
Format option in the lower left corner of the summary panel. This
option will cause the simulation data set to include reservoir
initialization parameters such as porosity and permeability.
Review the summary. Then click the Finish button.

22 Basic Operations: Working with Case Files R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

The initialization file displays in the lower portion of the

SimDataStudio window. The data you entered populates the panels. No
red Status Indicators (indicating that required data is missing) should
display on the Options Tree. If desired, you can continue adding
optional information.

Create a New Case by Parsing an Existing VIP Data Set

This option opens two additional fields that let you select an existing
simulation file from which data will be copied into the new name.

Click the Folder icon located beside each field to open the File
Selection dialog box. Filter to the VIP data file to select and click the
OK button.

Recognized data from each file will populate the SimDataStudio

panels. If the original data files contain any keywords that are not
available in the SimDataStudio software, you receive a message similar
to the one shown below:

If you click the NO button, only the data recognized by the

SimDataStudio software will be included in the new data file(s). If you
click the YES button, the data will be saved to a *.inc file in the current
directory so you can create an include file.

R5000.0.1 Basic Operations: Working with Case Files 23

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Opening an Existing Case

Use the following steps if you want to open an existing case in the
SimDataStudio software. When you do so, all worksheets and editing
windows will be filled with the data previously compiled and saved for
that case.

1. Select File > Recent Cases on the SimDataStudio menu bar, to see
if the case you want to open is available on the Recent Cases
submenu. If not, select File > Open Case, or press Ctrl-O to
display the Open Case dialog box.

Folder being
viewed

List of files in
this folder

File selected
for opening
File Type filters to
*.vds

2. If you do not see the desired case, use the Look in drop-down list
to locate the folder where the case is located.

3. Select the desired File name from the file list and click Open.

4. Notice that your selected case name now appears on the title bar at
the top of the SimDataStudio main window.

Saving and Closing the Current Case

You can save your work in the SimDataStudio software at any time
using File > Save Case, or by pressing Ctrl-S. You can also close the
current case using File > Close Case. Closing a case affects only the
contents in the top half of the main window. If you have a data file
displayed in the bottom half of the main window (as explained next), it
remains open.

24 Basic Operations: Working with Case Files R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Working with Simulation Data Files

In addition to case files, the SimDataStudio software also lets you work
with simulation data files. In fact, the main purpose of the
SimDataStudio software is to produce these files for use in a
simulation.

• SimDataStudio case files (*.vds) store the data and program

options that you use when working on a case. They make it easy to
start up the SimDataStudio software and resume work on a
particular case.

• Nexus simulation files (.fcs.) are formatted for the Nexus

simulator. They are generated using the icon or the Simulation
Data > Generate Simulator Data File >Nexus Files menu
option.

• VIP-CORE® (*i.dat) and VIP-EXEC® (*r.dat) simulation files are

specially formatted to work with the VIP simulators. If you parsed
in VIP simulation files to create the Nexus file, you may want keep
the VIP files current with the Nexus version. The Nexus software
allows you to generate new VIP files using the or the
Simulation Data > Generate Simulator Data File >VIP-CORE
and VIP-EXEC Files menu option.

You can use the SimDataStudio software to create new simulation files
or work with existing ones. The following set of procedures explains
how to do this.

Creating a New Simulation File

A new Nexus simulation file is created automatically in the lower half
of the main window, as you work within the SimDataStudio software.

As you work with and build the simulation file, you can use the options
on the File menu to save the data file, save it using a different name, or
close the file. These options are explained on the following pages.

R5000.0.1 Basic Operations: Working with Simulation Data Files 25

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Opening an Existing Data File

The SimDataStudio software also lets you open existing Nexus
simulation data files. For instance, you may have already created a
simulation data file and now you want to open it in the SimDataStudio
software to augment it with new data.

To work with an existing simulation data file, you must first open it in
the SimDataStudio software. The file you are opening can be an
existing .fcs file or VIP i.dat and/or r.dat files from which you intend to
generate Nexus data). Use these steps:

1. Select File > Recent VIP CORE Data Files or Recent EXEC or
Recent Nexus Data Files to see if the data file you want to open is
listed on the submenu. If so, select it. If not, select File > Open
VIP Data File and select VIP CORE, VIP EXEC, or Nexus
Case from the submenu to display the following dialog box:

Folder being
viewed

List of files in
this folder

File selected
for opening
File Type filters to
*i.dat and then *r.dat

2. If you do not see the desired data file in this list, use the Look in
drop-down list to locate the folder where the data file is stored.

3. Click the desired File name in the file list and click the Open
button.

Notice that the selected simulation data file now appears in the
editing window at the bottom of the SimDataStudio main window.
You can use this window to view and edit the contents of the data
file. Standard editing controls are provided. You can insert the text
cursor on any line, type new text, backspace, delete, cut/copy/
paste, insert, move the cursor up or down, and perform other
standard editing operations.

26 Basic Operations: Working with Simulation Data Files R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Saving the Data File

You can save the simulation file at any time using File > Save Data
File. Once you save the simulation file, this menu option is dimmed
(turns gray) until the next time you make changes the data file in the
lower half of the SimDataStudio main window.

Occasionally, you may want to save different versions of the data file
for use in different simulations. To save a different version of the
current data file.

1. Select File > Save Data File as and select VIP CORE, VIP
EXEC, or Nexus from the submenu. This displays the following
dialog box:

Folder where
file will
be saved

List of
existing
files

Filename
to use
for new
version

2. Use the Save in drop-down list to locate the folder where you want
the data file to be stored.

3. Type in the File name you want to use for saving this data file.
The data file must have a file extension of *i.dat, *r.dat, or *.fcs.
These are the extensions for the VIP-CORE®, VIP-EXEC®, and
Nexus case names, respectively.

4. Click the Save button to begin saving the data file under a new
name. You will see a progress box, informing you that the file is
being copied.

R5000.0.1 Basic Operations: Working with Simulation Data Files 27

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Closing the Current Data File

Once you have saved your changes, you can close the data file using
File > Close Data File. Closing a data file affects only the contents in
the bottom half of the main window. If you have a case already working
in the top half of the main window, it remains open and you can
continue working with it as you generate or open other data files.

28 Basic Operations: Working with Simulation Data Files R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Customizing the View

The SimDataStudio software provides many options that let you
customize the view.

Changing the Location of Toolbars

Each toolbar in the SimDataStudio main window has its own handle
that you can use to drag the toolbar to a new position. To move a
toolbar:

1. Use the mouse to grab the handle. In other words, move the mouse
over the handle and hold down the left mouse button.
Toolbar
handle

2. Drag the mouse to any other location in the main window where
you want the toolbar to be located and release the left mouse
button. This “drops” the toolbar at the selected location.

3. If you drop the toolbar into any gray area of the main window, it
reappears at that location. If you drop the toolbar into any white
area of the main window (e.g., into the production data
worksheet), it “floats” at the selected location inside its own tiny
“inset window,” as shown here:

4. You can continue adjusting the position of the toolbar, even if it is

displayed in an inset window. To do this, use the mouse cursor to
grab the blue title bar at the top of the inset window (e.g., the bar
with “Well Options” in the image above), then release the mouse
when the inset window has moved to a new location.

R5000.0.1 Basic Operations: Customizing the View 29

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Controlling the Display of Toolbars and Status Bar

You can display or hide both the toolbar at the top and the status bar at
the bottom of the SimDataStudio main window. Follow these steps:

1. Click open the View menu and examine the first two options:

When these options are checked, the toolbar and status bar are
currently displayed. When unchecked, the toolbar and status bar
are hidden.

2. Selecting the Status Bar option turns the status bar on/off
automatically.

3. Selecting the Toolbar option opens the Toolbars control panel:

4. In the Toolbar control panel, click any of the check boxes to turn
them on or off. You will see the SimDataStudio window change
dynamically as you click each option:

• Menu bar - cannot be turned off.

• File - shows or hides the 10 icons related to File menu and Edit
menu options (new, open, save, cut, copy, paste, delete, print).

30 Basic Operations: Customizing the View R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

• Production Data - shows or hides the four toolbar icons

related to production data.

• Wells Options - shows or hides the four toolbar icons related

to well data.

• Simulation Def -- shows or hides the five icons related to the

CORE initialization (grid, regions and fluids, water and rock
properties, advanced options and grid model).

• Show Tooltips - shows or hides the pop-up descriptions that

appear when you hover the mouse over a toolbar icon.

• Cool Look - changes the appearance of the toolbar icons from

flat to raised. The “cool look” is a flat appearance, more in line
with recent versions of Microsoft products.

• Large Buttons - changes the size of the toolbar icons - makes

them larger and more visible.

5. Click the Close button when finished to close the panel. Other
options that you can perform using this panel are covered next.

Customizing the Toolbars

In addition to displaying or hiding toolbars, you can actually customize
the icons shown on each toolbar. Follow these steps:

1. Select View > Toolbar to open the Toolbars control panel:

R5000.0.1 Basic Operations: Customizing the View 31

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

2. Click the Customize button to display the following control panel:

This panel has two “tabs” displayed across the top of it: Toolbars
and Commands.

• The Toolbars tab shows the same basic options found on the
Toolbars control panel.

• The Commands tab shows the complete set of icons available

with each standard toolbar category.
3. Click the Commands tab to see the available icons for each
toolbar.

4. Use this panel interactively with the toolbar at the top of the
window.

32 Basic Operations: Customizing the View R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

• Click on each toolbar type in the Categories list to see the

icons (Buttons) normally associated with it. These are the
default icons for each toolbar set.

• Click on each icon to view its purpose in the Description field.

• You can drag any icon from this panel and drop it into any
toolbar currently displayed in the SimDataStudio main
window, as desired. To do this, move the mouse over the icon
in the panel and hold down the left mouse button as you move
the mouse into the SimDataStudio main window. Continue
dragging the icon until it is at the location where you want to
insert it, then let go of the mouse button to insert it.

• You can remove any icon from the toolbars currently displayed
In the SimDataStudio main window. To do this, move the
mouse over the icon to be discarded and hold down the left
mouse button as you move the mouse away from the toolbar.
When you let go of the mouse button, the icon disappears.

5. Click the OK button to close the Customize panel and the Close
button to close the Toolbar control panel.

Creating a New Toolbar

You can create and name an entirely new toolbar, then drag any of the
available icons to it. Follow these steps.

1. Select View/Toolbar and click the Customize button to view the

Customize panel.

2. When the Customize panel appears, click the New button under
the Toolbars tab. This displays the following field:

R5000.0.1 Basic Operations: Customizing the View 33

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

3. Enter the desired Toolbar name and click OK. You will see an
empty toolbar inset floating inside the main window:

4. Select the Commands tab on the Customize panel, then select the
Category containing the icons you want to place on the new
toolbar.

5. Drag the icons from the Customize panel into the new Tool inset
area.

6. Drag the toolbar inset containing the new icons into the Toolbar
area of the main window and drop it between any other two
existing toolbars.

34 Basic Operations: Customizing the View R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Resetting or Deleting Toolbars

Even after making all these changes, you can still reset the toolbars to
their original configurations by using the following steps. You can also
delete any new toolbars you have added.

1. Select View/Toolbar to view the Toolbars control panel.

2. To reset any of the original toolbars to their original status, click

the name of the toolbar to be reset and then click the Reset button.

3. To delete any of the new toolbars that you created, click the name
of the toolbar and then click the Delete button.

R5000.0.1 Basic Operations: Customizing the View 35

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

36 Basic Operations: Customizing the View R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Setting User Preferences

Introduction

Before starting to work extensively with the SimDataStudio™

software, you may want to set up all of the User Options on the View
menu. There are nine sets of user options, as described in the following
discussion. They can be set individually or all at once. You can view
the user options in the Default Options dialog box, which you invoke
by selecting View > User Options.

Setting the User Options tells the SimDataStudio software what your
preferences are when using the program. These are the “default
selections” that will appear in other dialog boxes later in the program.
Instead of having to make the same selections over and over -- each
time you use a dialog box -- you can set them once here so that they
will be automatically selected when encountered later.

Setting your preferences here does not force you always to use these
options. In every dialog box where you see these options applied, you
will still be able to change your selection, within the context of that
specific dialog.

Many of these options will make more sense once you start using the
program. If so, you can always return to the User Options panel and
reset your preferences anytime. Complete instructions are provided on
the following pages.

R5000.0.1 Setting User Preferences: Introduction 37

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Setting Preferences for Dates - Units - Formats

You can specify the default date formats and measurement units to be
used in the SimDataStudio software. To set these preferences, follow
these steps:

1. Select View > User Options to display the User Options control
panel.

2. Select the Dates-Units tab at the top of this panel.

3. Review the available options and make appropriate changes as

desired. These are the default date settings that will be applied to
dates generated by the SimDataStudio software. A complete
description of available options is provided in the following table.

4. When finished viewing and/or changing the Date-Unit options, go

to the next tab in the User Options panel, or click the OK button to
close the User Options panel.

38 Setting User Preferences: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Options on the “Dates-Units-Formats” Tab

Category Option How To Use It
Default Date Full Date or Click the toggle to display either the full data (DD-Month-YYYY) or the time
Formats Time from from the start of the simulation.
Simulation
Start Date
Y2K Pivot Use the scroll arrows or retype the number to reflect the correct Y2K Pivot
Year Year. This number will be used to convert from two- to four-digit dates for Y2K
purposes. Any two-digit years below this number will be converted to 20xx
dates and years above this number will be converted to 19xx dates. Specifying
30 as the Y2K Pivot Year, for example, converts years from 1-30 as 2001, 2002,
etc. and years from 31-99 as 1931, 1932, etc.
Default Unit Field Units/ Select whether you want default units to be field units (English units), metric
Formats Metric Units units, or lab units. Metric unit pressure options are kPa, kg/cm2, or bar.
Floating point Use the scroll arrows or retype the number to indicate the default number of
precision decimal positions for display of numeric values.
Default Time Print Options / This lets you specify the types and frequency of reports to be generated during
Frequencies Frequency the simulation. To see a list of all available reports, click the button to the right
of the Print Options field. Use the Frequency field to the right of the Print
Options field to select a default frequency for reports. For example, you may
want the reports to be generated every three months during the simulation.

Plot Options / PLOT options are a standard feature that let you specify data sets to be
Frequency generated for use with the PLOTVIEW™ software. To see a list of all available
options, click the button to the right of the PLOT Options field. Use the
Frequency field to the right of the PLOT Options field to select a default
frequency for generating data sets. For example, you may want plot data to be
generated at the gathering center level and at the field level every three months
during the simulation.

Map Options/ MAP options are a standard feature that let you specify data sets to be generated
Frequency for use with the 3DVIEW™ software. To see a list of all available options, click
the button to the right of the MAP Options field. Use the Frequency field to
the right of the MAP Options field to select a default frequency for generating
data sets. For example, you may want to generate a set of pressures, saturations,
and fluid volumes every month during the simulation.

Restart Use the check box to indicate whether you want restart records to be written
Options / that will allow you to restart the simulation at a specific point in time. Use the
Frequency Frequency field to specify the default frequency of the restart records.
Well By Well/ By Within the well constraints table, you have the option of viewing data by well or
Constraints Constraint by wells meeting specific criteria (i.e., gas producers at maximum rate). This
View Mode toggle lets you define the default display when you first open a session.

R5000.0.1 Setting User Preferences: Introduction 39

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Setting the Default Color and Chart Options

You can specify the colors and line widths to be used in charting
production data and other information. To set these preferences, follow
these steps:

1. Select View > User Options to display the User Options control
panel.

2. Select the Color and Chart tab at the top of this panel.

3. Notice the color codes in the top half of this panel. These are the
colors that will be used to chart the indicated values in any
displayed charts. This type of color-coding makes it easy to
distinguish between different types of data.

40 Setting User Preferences: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

4. You can change any color by clicking on it. This brings up a

detailed color palette that you can use to select a new color.

5. Select an appropriate color from the list of Basic Colors at left, or

click inside the color field at right to select a random hue. You will
see a comparison of the previous/selected color demonstrated in
the Color Solid field, along with the actual HSL and RGB values.
If you like a particular color and want to reuse it, click on Add to
Custom Colors and the new color will appear in your Custom
Colors list. Otherwise, just click on OK to apply the your color
selection to the Display Options panel.

6. Repeat the last two steps for each color that you want to change.

7. Notice the line width values in the bottom half of the Display
Options panel. These are the line widths (in pixels) that will be
used to chart the indicated values in any displayed charts. You can
make the line widths thicker or thinner for each data type by
incrementing/decrementing this value. To change a line width
value, click on it and retype or use the scroll arrows that appear
when the cursor is focused in the current table cell.

8. Notice the line types and symbols. These are the line types and
symbols that will be used to chart the indicated values in any
displayed charts. Click in the field to display the drop-down menu.
Select the line type or symbol from the menu.

R5000.0.1 Setting User Preferences: Introduction 41

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

9. Notice the chart background, required field, and optional field

color displays at the bottom of the dialog box. Click to down arrow
to open a color selection chart. Select the color. Or select Other to
open the color palette. Select the default background color for
charts. Or change the default color-coding for required and
mandatory fields within the application.

10. When finished viewing and/or changing the Display Options, go to

the next tab in the User Options panel, or click the OK button to
close this dialog box.

Setting the Default Reservoir Model Type

1. Select View > User Options to display the User Options control
panel.

2. Select the Reservoir Model tab at the top of this panel.

42 Setting User Preferences: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

3. Review the available options and make appropriate changes as

desired. A complete description of available options is provided in
the following table.

4. When finished changing the reservoir options, go to the next tab in

the User Options panel, or click the OK button to close the User
Options panel.

Options on the “Reservoir Model” Tab

Category Option How To Use It
Default Fluid Black oil, gas- Click the toggle to define the default fluid model and corresponding molecular
Formulation water, water- weight that will be selected under the CORE - Basic Utilities tab. If you select
oil, enhanced enhanced black oil, you can also specify oil and gas phase.
black oil, black
oil with K-
Values,
compositional
Default saturation, Click the stepper to define the number of table entries when the correlation
Number of black oil option is used.
Table Entries (above bubble
point and
below bubble
point)
Default Oil or Gas This option indicates that you want to constrain wells using a maximum oil rate,
Producer Rate Producer at which point the well may automatically switch over to gas production. The
Constraints gas-oil ratio (GOR) controlling switchover is entered on this panel, as well.
Total Liquid This option indicates that you want to constrain wells using a maximum liquid
Producer rate, which is the sum of the oil and water phase.
Producer with This option indicates that you want to constrain wells using a specified rate for
Each Phase each of the oil, gas and water phases. These rates are specified elsewhere in the
Specified SimDataStudio software, and are covered where appropriate in this manual.
GOR Switch The gas-oil ratio switch for converting to/from oil-gas production. Available
only if you select the Oil or Gas Producer option. The units used for defining
the switchover will depend on which unit type you selected in the Dates - Units
- Formats panel.

R5000.0.1 Setting User Preferences: Introduction 43

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Observed Data
You can specify how observed data files should be generated and
reported. To set these preferences, follow these steps:

1. Select View > User Options to display the User Options control
panel.

2. Select the Observed Data tab at the top of this panel.

3. Review the available options and make appropriate changes as

desired. These are the default date settings that will be applied to
dates generated by the SimDataStudio software and used in your
data file. A complete description of available options is provided
in the following table.

44 Setting User Preferences: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

4. When finished viewing and/or changing the Observed Data

options, go to the next tab in the User Options panel, or click the
OK button to close the User Options panel.

Options on the “Observed Data” Tab

Category Option How To Use It
Source Raw or Click the toggle to define the default observed data source.
averaged
Default Start, end Select the production cycle interval to select
Production middle
Interval
Default Oil or Gas This option indicates that you want to constrain wells using a maximum oil rate,
Producer Rate Producer at which point the well may automatically switchover to gas production. The
Constraints gas-oil ratio (GOR) controlling switchover is entered on this panel, as well.
Write names to Write related keyword names to the OBS (observed data) file.
OBS
Use million unit for field/region CWP and CWI data classes imported from PLOTVIEW are in units of million
class cumulative water stb or million m3. OBS data. But, in other cases, data is written to the VDB in
thousand stb or thousand m3. This option lets you transfer data to million stb or
me for one-to-one comparison.
Write region Write OBS data to region file
data

R5000.0.1 Setting User Preferences: Introduction 45

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Setting the VIP® Data File Generation

You can specify various preferences indicating how you want data to be
used or how you want it to appear in the data files and other types of
data generated by the SimDataStudio software. To set your preferences,
use these steps:

1. Select View > User Options to display the User Options control
panel.

2. Select the VIP Data File Generation tab at the top of this panel.

46 Setting User Preferences: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

3. Review the available options and make appropriate changes as

desired. A complete description of available options is provided in
the following table.

Options on the “VIP Data File Generation” Tab

Category How To Use It
OS ascii Data The default it to write data files in PC ASCII data format.
Format When opening data files for viewing, differences in line
feeds and other characters cause the files to look
somewhat nicer if they are written the format on which
they are read. Click the toggle to write the data files to
UNIX format if this where you would normally read
them.
Path for Include Depending on how your include file directories are
File Card organized, click the toggle to select the desired option.
Formats For example, if your include files are normally stored in a
subdirectory under the case, you may want to always
maintain the relative path. On the other hand, if you have
a standard directory under which all include files are
stored, you may want to always maintain the full path.
Date Cards Specify whether you want the date records in your data
file to be in DATE format (DDMMYYYY) or in TIME
format (number of days since beginning of simulation).
By default all dates seen get generated in the data set. If
the Generate Cards At First Day of Month Only toggle
is active, then only dates at first day of the month are
written out to data set. Activating this option can avoid
having so many cards in a data set that the simulation
process is slowed.
Well List Specify whether you want to use well names or well
numbers when generating well lists.
Comments Specify whether to use standard, user-defined, or no
comments. User-defined comments are those provided on
the Region Management Table Description and
Comments option. If you activate the Write Wells
Production and Perforation Source Data at beginning
of Recurrent File toggle, this data will always be written
at the top of the file.
Well and Include well production and perforation source at
Perforation beginning of recurrent file.
Source
Perforation Data Click toggles to define when perforation status is OFF and
left justification of well column in the perforation data.
Also click the toggle to specify whether or not to log
intervals when a well has a production rate but no
perforation to let it flow.

R5000.0.1 Setting User Preferences: Introduction 47

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

4. When finished viewing and/or changing the Well Constraint

options, go to the next tab in the User Options panel, or click the
OK button to close this dialog box.

48 Setting User Preferences: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Setting the Parsing Options

You can specify various preferences indicating what data you want to
include when you parse a VIP-CORE® or VIP-EXEC® data file. To set
your preferences, use these steps:

1. Select View > User Options to display the User Options control
panel.

2. Select the Parsing Options tab at the top of this panel.

3. Review the available options and make appropriate changes as

desired. These are the default date settings that will be applied
when files are parsed into the SimDataStudio software. A

R5000.0.1 Setting User Preferences: Introduction 49

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

complete description of available options is provided in the

following table.

Options on the “Parsing Options” Tab

Category How To Use It
Comments The default is to import comments from the CORE or
EXEC file. Deactivate the toggle to ignore comments.
Skip Cards The VIP software allows SKIP and NOSKIP cards to be
placed between data the simulator should ignore. By
default, data between these cards are placed in an external
include file (.inc) when parsed in. Deactivate this toggle
to set a default that will ignore the data between skip
cards.
Unrecognized The default is to write unrecognized data to an include
Data file. You can select to write the data instead as external
include data (on the External Include panel) or to ignore
it.
Grid Arrays The default is to keep include files for arrays and
modifiers. You can deactivate the toggle to write the
include data directly into the case file.
You can click the ellipse button to open the Array List and
use the check boxes to indicate which arrays within the
VDB you want to import or ignore when parsing the data.
Precision for When reading binary data from the VDB for export as a
data in binary text file, click the stepper to indicate the precision for the
files floating point decimals.

50 Setting User Preferences: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Options on the “Parsing Options” Tab

Category How To Use It
Production Data For production data that uses a full date format
(day+month+year), that date can be interpreted as the start
or the end of the production interval. For the first case,
make sure the checkbox Production data are reported
at start of production interval is marked and unmarked
for the second case, or production data might get allocated
to the wrong time slot.
Example, assuming monthly data:
Ascii input data:
WELL DATE OIL
W1 1-Jun-80 250
W1 1-Jul-80 150
W1 1-Aug-80 200
If production data are reported at start of production
interval, vds will use the following
1-Jun-80 to 1-Jul-80 => 250 units of oil
1-Jul-80 to 1-Aug-80 => 150 units of oil
1-Aug-80 to 1-Sep-80 => 200 units of oil
If production data are reported at end of production
interval, vds will use the following
1-May-80 to 1-Jun-80 => 250 units of oil
1-Jun-80 to 1-Jul-80 => 150 units of oil
1-Jul-80 to 1-Aug-80 => 200 units of oil

R5000.0.1 Setting User Preferences: Introduction 51

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Options on the “Parsing Options” Tab

Category How To Use It
Perforation When the end of a perforation interval is not specified
Wizard (MD2 / MD2 column), the perforation interval is assumed
to go to the end of the trace.
WELL X Y Z MD
W1 6100 5000 0.00 0.00
W1 0 50007 937.50 11704.77
DATE WELL EVENT MD1 MD2
1-1-2000 w1 perf 5835.51 6249.06
1-1-2000 w1 perf 6666.98
In the above example the second perf interval will be
[6666.98, 11704.77].
The following format can be used instead to specify that a
well is shut down at a given time:
DATE WELL EVENT MD1 MD2
1-1-2000 w1 perf 5800 6000
1-1-2001 w1 perf 6200 6300
1-1-2002 w1 plug 0
In this case, the perforation wizard will by default create a
perforation interval from [0, end of trace] which will
perforate the well over all the intersection of the trace
with the grid. However, if you activate the “Only shut
existing perfs ….” toggle, only the already existing perf
intervals will be shut in -- i.e., it will be equivalent to
enter the following:
DATE WELL EVENT MD1 MD2
1-1-2000 w1 perf 5800 6000
1-1-2001 w1 perf 6200 6300
1-1-2002 w1 plug 5800 6000
1-1-2002 w1 plug 6200 6300
Refer to “ASCII file format to import Well Perf Data” on
page 317 for a description of perforation file formats.

4. When finished viewing and/or changing the Parsing options, click

the OK button to close the User Options panel.

52 Setting User Preferences: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Setting the Nexus® Case (Initialization) Generation Options

You can specify various preferences indicating how you want your
Nexus initialization file to be handled when it is generated within the
SimDataStudio software. To set your preferences, use these steps:

1. Select View > User Options to display the User Options control
panel.

2. Select the Nexus -> Case Generation + Initialization Data tab at

the top of this panel.

Structured grid
format: special
text simulation
output

3. Review the available options and make appropriate changes as

desired. These are the default date settings that will be applied
when Nexus files are generated in the SimDataStudio software. A

R5000.0.1 Setting User Preferences: Introduction 53

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

complete description of available options is provided in the

following table.

Options on the “Nexus Case Generation + Initialization” Tab

Category How To Use It
Case File By default, the data files associated with the master case
Generation (.fcs) file are written to a subdirectory named nexus_data
located under the case main directory. You can change the
path/filename to which data files will be written.
When the Write Log Information... option is selected,
log data will be written to individual files when the Nexus
case is generated.
Grid Array Files You can set the percentage of dead cells within an array
beyond which the cells will be compressed in the include
file. The default is 30%.
By default, the SimDataStudio software will
automatically verify the right or left handedness of a grid
and change it if necessary. Deactivate this default if you
want to retain the grid handedness without verification.
Note: It is recommended that you leave this toggle active,
since different gridding packages (including the
PowerGrid™ software) have varying criteria for
handedness.
Toggle on the Generate grid dependent data using
structured grid input format option if you want the
Nexus data set to include a grid.dat file that includes
porosity, net-to-gross, and permeability values. This
option is useful if you intend to perform uncertainty
analysis and you want to expose these reservoir properties
for uncertainty modeling.
Warning: If you are creating a binary .fcs simulation file
(typical), the structured grid output put toggle must be
OFF. If you are creating an ASCII structured grid, it must
be ON.

54 Setting User Preferences: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Options on the “Nexus Case Generation + Initialization” Tab

Category How To Use It
Map File - VDB Several options are available for writing the Map File to
Generation for the VDB:
INIT Class
• Write initialization map file with binary format. By
default, the map file is written with ASCII format.
Toggling this option on will reduce the size of the map
file.
• Write initialization map file with packed format.
Toggling this option off will cause the map file to be
written with array data for all cells, active and inactive.
• Always load the map file to the VDB (default is yes)
• Rename the vdb when renaming a vds case
• Compress the map file when written to a network
drive. This creates a ZIP file on the network. Note: If
the file is a multi-reservoir map file, it will unzip
automatically. Otherwise, you will have to unzip it.
• Load INIT class directly to the VDB when working
across a network drive. (This will speed up the process
when working across a network.)
PVT Data Always use VIP-EOS default binary interaction
Generation coefficients for predefined components - This option
primarily applies to VIP to Nexus conversions. If you do
not select this option, you will get the the Nexus default
for non-input coefficients. These may be different from
the VIP ones.
Use PSAT at closest depth entry to convert VIP
BOTABL with depth-dependent PSAT when GOC is
outside table depth - This option applies to VIP black oil
table conversion. The routine that does the calculation
needs PSAT at the gas-oil contact.
The option applies when there is a PSAT vs. depth table
entered in the initialization data and the GOC is outside
the table:
• If the option is toggled on, the PSAT at the first or last
table entry will be used, depending if GOC is above or
below the table depth range.
• If the is option not toggled on, the PSAT will be
interpolated linearly from the first 2 or last 2 table
entries.

R5000.0.1 Setting User Preferences: Introduction 55

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Setting the Nexus Recurrent Data Options

You can specify various preferences indicating how you want your
Nexus recurrent file to be handled when it is generated within the
SimDataStudio software. To set your preferences, use these steps:

1. Select View > User Options to display the User Options control
panel.

2. Select the Nexus - Recurrent Data tab at the top of this panel.

3. Review the available options and make appropriate changes as

desired. These are the default date settings that will be applied
when Nexus files are generated in the SimDataStudio software. A

56 Setting User Preferences: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

complete description of available options is provided in the

following table.

Options on the “Nexus Recurrent Data” Tab

Category How To Use It
Targeting For single reservoirs, targeting will be ignored when you
include the reservoir in a multi-reservoir run. Instead,
only the multi-reservoir surface file will be used.
Perforation This option is not yet functional.
Generation
VIP Well Names These options apply to the SimDataStudio software
conversions of VIP data to Nexus data. Nexus well names
can be up to 40 characters long. The VIP limit is 8
characters. If this option is active, the SimDataStudio
software will always truncate the Nexus well names (to
the first 8 characters only.) and Nexus gas stream data will
be the default.
Gas Streams Use gas stream data parsed from the VIP software
Network Setup These options are not yet functional.
for Tubing and
Bottomhole
Node Upstream
Connection
Node and Sort by name or type. Set the default precision for
Connection profiles.
Tables
Date Format By default, Nexus writes out dates using the month/day/
year (mm/dd/yyyy) format. To write out dates using the
day/month/year (dd/mm/yyyy) format, toggle the Use
European data format option on. This option applies to
new cases only.

R5000.0.1 Setting User Preferences: Introduction 57

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Setting the ECLIPSE™ Import Options

You can specify various preferences indicating how you want your
ECLIPSE data to be imported into the SimDataStudio software. To set
your preferences, use these steps:

1. Select View > User Options to display the User Options control
panel.

2. Select the Eclipse Import tab at the top of this panel.

Review the available options and make appropriate changes as desired.

These are the default date settings that will be applied when Nexus files
are generated in the SimDataStudio software.

58 Setting User Preferences: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Defining Initialization Utility Data

Introduction

General utility data is divided into two branches: basic and advanced.
Basic options include the options used in most datasets: grid system,
fluid model, output and region array controls, fluid and reservoir
constants, and dimensions data. Advanced data options allow more
specialized input for defining a special reservoir model: initialization
options, EOS-PVT options, and saturation table and hysteresis
options.Click the (+) button beside Utility Data on the options tree.
Then double-click on the utility data icon beside the Basic Options
or Advanced Options branch to open the associated tabs. When you
double-click on a tab, the related entry pane opens. Each option is
described in detail.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Introduction 59

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Unit Grid System

Perform the following steps to complete the Grid System panel.

General Information
1. Specify simulation start date. Click the down arrow beside the
Start Date field. Select the simulation start date from the pop-up
calendar as shown below.

Time is initialized to zero at this date. VIP-CORE® and Nexus®

both account for leap years.

2. Specify units. Click the down arrow beside the Units field and
select the data units. The default is field units.

Changing Units

The current case units display in the Units field. If you change the units for
the case, the production data units do not change. But the production data
will be converted to the specified units when used to calculate production
rates and rate constraints for the current case. For example, if you have a
production data rate of 1 barrel per day, production data in which you have
specified metric units will be output as a QMAX of 0.159 m3/day.
Production data in which you have specified field units will be output as a
QMAX of 1/barrel/day.

3. Provide title(s). Click in the Title field(s) and enter up to three

lines (80 characters each) of optional title information. Use these
fields to identify the simulation runs. For the VIP software, the
title description will print in the initialization (i.dat) output reports.
For the Nexus software, it will appear in the .out and .fcs files.

60 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Unit Grid System R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Grid System
There are three ways to define the grid. You can specify grid files that
were created within the GRIDGENR™ application, within an existing
VDB, or by defining a simple Cartesian grid.

The GRIDGENR software recommended

The GRIDGENR software lets you easily create complex grids. This is
the recommended method for defining all but very simple grids.

You can define a simple grid within the Utilities panel.

Defining Arrays for a Simple Grid

If you define a simple grid, you must also define the grid arrays located
under the Grid Data branch.

Or you can select to use the grid from a VDB.

Procedures for specifying GRIDGENR files and defining simple grids

are described below.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Unit Grid System 61

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Specify GRIDGENR Files

Perform the following steps to specify GRIDGENR files:

1. Open the File Definition pane. Click the Use GRIDGENR Grid
Files toggle. The file definition pane opens as shown below.

Click to define LGR file

2. Define grid file. Click the Folder icon located next to the Grid
Definition File field. The File Selection dialog box opens. Filter
and select the grid (.lgr) file. When the file is selected, click the
Open button to close the dialog box.

The corresponding .cor is entered in the Physical Properties

File field. If a corresponding .fml file exists, the Fault in Model
toggle activates, and the corresponding .fml file is entered in the
Fault Definition field. (Deactivate the toggle if you do not want to
include the fault file.) Include statements for these files are added
to the initialization file.

Editing Local Grid Refinements

You can add, edit, or remove LGRs from the GRIDGENR definitions.
Procedures for defining local grid refinements are provided in “Local Grid
Refinements” on page 64.

62 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Unit Grid System R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Define Simple Grid

Click the Define Simple Grid toggle. The Main Grid menu options
open.

The simple grid definition is written directly into the initialization file.

Define Cartesian Grid

Perform the following steps to define a Cartesian grid.

1. Open Cartesian definition fields. Click the Define Cartesian Grid

toggle. The Cartesian grid definition fields open as shown below.

2. Enter number of gridblocks. Enter the root grid in number of

gridblocks in the X direction (NX), Y direction (NY), and Z
direction (NZ).

Adding Local Grid Refinements

Refer to “Local Grid Refinements” on page 64.

Use Grid from VDB

Perform the following steps to select a grid from a VDB:

1. Specify option. Click the Use Grid from VDB toggle to activate
the option. Two selection fields open to allow you to specify the
VDB and the case.

2. Specify the VDB. Click the folder icon located next to the
VDB Database field. Filter and select the VDB.

3. Specify the Case. Click the folder icon located next to the
Case field. A dialog box opens listing all cases for the specified
VDB. Click on the case to select and click OK to close the dialog
box.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Unit Grid System 63

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Local Grid Refinements

GRIDGENR Software Recommended

The GRIDGENR application lets you easily create LGRs. This is the
recommended method for defining all but very simple, rectangular LGRs.

Perform the following steps to open the LGR definition pane.

1. Activate LGR pane. With your root grid defined, click the Use
Local Grid Refinement toggle to activate the LGR pane as shown
below.

Your root grid and any previously defined LGRs display in the
pane.

You can define LGRs (as a function of parent grid refinement),

delete LGRs, or edit LGR properties using the right mouse button
menu shown below.

64 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Unit Grid System R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

LGR Formats

When you create, delete, or edit an LGR file within SimDataStudio™, the LGR
definition is written or updated directly in the initialization file. When you specify
a GRIDGENR LGR, an include statement is written in the initialization file

When you have selected GRIDGENR LGR files, you can deactivate the Use
GRIDGENR Files toggle to create, delete or edit the LGR data. When you
deactivate the toggle, the include statement is removed from the initialization file
and all LGR information defined from the the Grid System pane is written directly
into the initialization file. Your GRIDGENR properties and fault file include
statements are retained in the initialization file.

If you reactivate the Use GRIDGENR Files toggle, the include statement for your
GRIDGENR LGR is restored and the LGR information defined from the Grid
System pane is deleted from the initialization file.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Unit Grid System 65

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Add LGR
Perform the following steps to add an LGR:

1. With your pointer over the parent grid icon , select the Add
LGR option from the right mouse button menu. The LGR
Definition dialog box opens with the parent grid defined in the
dialog box title.
Parent Grid Definition

GRIDGENR Recommended

The GRIDGENR application lets you easily create local grid refinements.
This is the recommended method for defining all but very simple,
rectangular LGRs.

2. Specify LGR name. Click in the Refinement Name entry field and
enter an LGR name of up to 8 characters.

3. Specify refinement type. Click the Type of Refinement toggle to

select Cartesian. Radial refinements are not valid for the Nexus
software.

Continuing Grid Refinements through All Communicating

Layers

It is strongly recommended that all grid refinements are continued through

all communicating layers in the grid system.

66 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Unit Grid System R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

When you select the refinement type, the appropriate refinement

location and definition parameters display as follows

Cartesian I, J, K range and number of refined gridblocks in all

directions

Procedures for both types of grids are described below.

4. Specify I, J, K range. Click the up or down stepper arrow

located next to the I Location, J Location, or K Location fields
to define the parent I,J, K gridcell range(s) appropriate for your
grid type.

5. Specify number of refined gridblocks. Click the button beside

the Number of Refinements field(s).

The Number of Refinements dialog box opens as shown below.

The number of gridblocks corresponds to the gridblock range you
defined.

Click in the Number of Refinements field to activate the up or

down stepper arrow . For each gridblock, select the number of
refinements from that of the parent grid.

6. Enter well intersections. Click in the Location field and enter the
point where the well intersects the face of the gridblock.

Values must be fractions, with 0.5 being the gridblock center.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Unit Grid System 67

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Delete LGR
You can delete a GRIDGENR or defined LGR from the initialization
file. If you are removing a GRIDGENR LGR file from the initialization
file, you must first deactivate the Use GRIDGENR Grid Files toggle.
The LGR names will remain in the display.

Perform the following step to delete an LGR:

1. Position your pointer over the grid icon to delete.

2. Select the Delete LGR option from the right mouse button menu.
The selected LGR is removed from the list of refined grids.

If the LGR was included from GRIDGENR, the original .lgr file is
not deleted from the directory, but the include statement in the current
initialization file is removed. If the LGR was defined within the
SimDataStudio software, the data is deleted.

Edit LGR Properties

You can reopen a Local Grid Refinement Definition dialog box to edit
previously defined properties. If you are editing a GRIDGENR LGR
file, you must first deactivate the Use GRIDGENR Grid Files toggle.
The LGR names will remain in the display.

Perform the following steps to edit LGR properties:

1. Select LGR. With your pointer over the grid icon to edit, select
the Edit LGR Properties option from the right mouse button
menu. The definition window for the selected LGR opens for
editing.

2. Edit the properties. Edit the data and then click OK to close the
definition window.

If the LGR was included from GRIDGENR, the original .lgr file is
not changed, but the include statement in the current initialization file is
removed and the modified LGR definition is placed directly into the
initialization file.

68 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Unit Grid System R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Exclude or Add gridblocks to LGR

Since LGRs must be defined as a single rectangular region, you can
exclude or add coarse gridblocks from the parent grid to further refine a
non-rectangular LGR area.

Perform the following steps to remove or add gridblocks.

1. Invoke the Local Grid Refinement Definition dialog box by right

clicking on an existing LGR and selecting Edit LGR Properties.

2. Open the tables. Click the Exclude Coarse Gridblocks and/or

Add Coarse Gridblocks toggle to activate the corresponding
table.

3. Define the gridblocks. Click the right mouse button to select the
Add Row or Remove Row option. When you add a row, the
columns display I,J, K ranges. Click in the cells to activate the up
or down stepper arrow to define the range of gridblocks to
exclude or add.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Unit Grid System 69

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Grid Decomposition for Parallel Submission

You can define default grid decomposition for parallel computing.
These values are written to the options.dat file. They remain active
until they are redefined here or overwritten within the Job Submittal
application.

Perform the following steps to decompose the grid:

1. Activate the toggle. Click the Specify Grid Decomposition

checkbox.

2. Select the option. Right-click on the grid to decompose as shown

below and select the Decompose Grid menu option.

The Grid Decomposition for Parallel Runs dialog box opens.

Decomposition units are called domains.

3. Define the X and Y domains. Click the Number of Domains

stepper to set the number of domains in the X and Y direction.
When you advance the stepper, a Specify Domain Sizes option
displays.

If you do not specify domain size, the application will use an

internal algorithm which considers the active cell count to divide
the grid in the most efficient manner possible without knowing the
number of available processors.

4. Specify domain size. Activate the Specify Domain Sizes toggle

and click the ellipse button . to open the Domain Size dialog
box for the corresponding direction. For each domain, click the
associated stepper to specify the number of gridblocks. Or enter
the number in the entry field.

70 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Unit Grid System R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Repeat the process described above for every grid you wish to
decompose. You assign the domains to the available processors within
the Job Submittal application.

Warning: Two Domains per Processor

You should assign at least two domains to each processor.

You must assign at least two domains to each processor.

The example below shows three domains in the X direction and two in
the Y direction. X direction domains have the grid sizes of 3, 2, and 4.
Y direction domains have a constant grid size of 3.

Domain 1 Domain 2 Domain 3

Domain 4 Domain 5 Domain 6

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Unit Grid System 71

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Fluid Model

Click the Fluid Model tab to open the Fluid Model panel.
Fluid Model tab

Rock Properties for

selected model

Fluid Properties
for selected model

Fluid Properties Table

Note that when you select a Fluid Model, the corresponding Fluid and Rock
Properties Tables activates in the options tree as shown in the illustration above.
Procedures for completing the Rock Properties Tables are described in “Rock
Property Tables” on page 122. Procedures for completing the Fluid Properties
Tables are described in “Fluid Property Tables” on page 129.

Fluid model options are:

• Black-Oil: standard pressure-dependent, three-phase option.

• Black-Oil with oil vaporization limit: allows the simulation of a

true black-oil system in which the K-value of the oil
component is near zero, which prevents the residual oil from
vaporizing during gas injection.

72 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Fluid Model R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

• Gas-Water: standard two-phase gas-water option useful for

cases with no oil or condensate in the reservoir (dry gas).

• Water-Oil: standard two-phase water-oil option useful for cases

with no gas in the reservoir.

• Enhanced Black-oil: three-phase option that models

condensates with black oil.

• Compositional: Models diverse fluid mixtures using N-

component (i.e. C1, C2) fluid description to simulate phase
behavior as a function of pressure and composition. Fluid
composition varies with time and space. When you specify this
option, an Import EOS-PVT Table from File field activates,
folder icon opens to allow you to filter and select the EOS-
PVT table to select.

• K-Values: special compositional model which uses equilibrium

ratio or K-value tables as a function of pressure. Phase
compositions are computed using K-values. Phase densities are
computed using correlations.

Perform the following steps to complete the Fluid Model panel.

1. Select fluid model. Click the toggle beside the model to select.

a. Black oil. If you selected Black-oil, click to activate the

Limit Oil Vaporization option if you do not want
residual oil to vaporize during gas injection.

b. Enhanced black oil. If you selected Enhanced Black-oil,

click to define the oil and gas phase component. Or click
the Import Black Oil PVT Table from File option to
filter and select an existing PVT data file.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Fluid Model 73

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

c. K-Values. If you selected K-Values or Compositional:

• Specify fluid type. Click the Fluid Type toggle,

• Specify number of hydrocarbon components. Click

the up or down stepper arrow to increase or decrease
the Number of Hydrocarbon Components.
Stepper arrows

• Open dialog box for component selection. Click the

button beside the same Hydrocarbon
Components field to open the Component Selection
dialog box. A component row displays for the
number of hydrocarbon components you specified.

• Specify hydrocarbon component names and

molecular weight. Click the down arrow to select
components from the drop-down menu as shown in
the illustration above. The default molecular weight

74 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Fluid Model R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

for the corresponding component display

automatically.

Defining Different Names or Weights

Optionally, you can double-click in the Component Name

field and enter a different name for the component. You
must then click in the Molecular Weight field and assign
the value.

You can also double-click in the Molecular Weight field

and change default values.

d. Compositional: If you selected Compositional:

• Import an EOS-PVT table from a file or specify

hydrocarbon components, component names, and
molecular weights.

The procedure for specifying components,

component names, and molecular weights is the
same as those described for K-Values on page 74.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Fluid Model 75

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Output and Region Data

Click the Output Data tab to define the controls for the initialization
array and print data that will be generated.
Output and Region Data

Each option is described in detail.

Results Files Control (Map Output)

The Results Control parameters define the initialization arrays that
will be written to the VDB (or map file if you select to save them
outside the VDB). The initialization arrays you specify will then be
available in the the 3DVIEW™ software.

Tip

You must specify at least one map option in the initialization file if you want to be
able to map recurrent arrays.

76 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Output and Region Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Perform the following steps to complete the Results File Control

parameters:

1. Open map options for selection. Click the button next to the
Map Options field. The Map Selection dialog box opens. Each
topic folder lists the associated arrays that can be written to the
initialization file.

2. Select map options. Click the plus (+) symbol beside a topic folder
to open the associated selection list. (Or click the minus (-) symbol
to close it.) Then click the check boxes to select the arrays as
shown below.

Click +/- to open/close topic

folder

Click check box to select/

deselect array

Red asterisk (*)

symbol indicates
folder contains
selections

Selection options will produce the following outputs:

ALL Map all appropriate arrays

NONE Map only pore volume and corner-point arrays
ADD Map both default and listed arrays

When you have selected all the map options that you want to be
written to the .vdb or .map file, click OK to close the Map
Selection dialog box.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Output and Region Data 77

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

3. Map Mole Fractions (compositional fluid model only).Click the

button next to the Liquid, Gas, and Overall fields, which
display only if you have selected the compositional fluid model.
The associated Component Selection dialog box opens. The
number of components you defined corresponds to the number of
hydrocarbon components in the fluid model as described on
page 74. Both dialog boxes are shown below.

Hydrocarbon Selected for

component mapping
defined

Fluid Model Definition Output Map Data

Hydrocarbon Definitions Map Mole Fractions

Click the check box by the component to map in the

appropriate dialog box as defined below.

Liquid Map Liquid Mole Fractions

Gas Map Vapor Mole Fractions
Overall Map overall hydrocarbon mole fractions

4. Do not use VDB option. The default is to write the map data
directly to the VDB file. Click the Do Not Use VDB toggle to
write the data to a map file outside the VDB. (The file will be
placed in your working directory with the name
<case_name>.map.)

Import the map file into the VDB

You can use the Convert utility to import the map file into the VDB.

a. Write formatted records. The default is to write a file

outside the VDB in binary format. Click the Write

78 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Output and Region Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Formatted Records toggle if you want the file written in

ASCII format.

The advantage of an ASCII file is that you can view and

edit the data. The disadvantage is that the ASCII file is
much larger.

5. Write full size map arrays. Controls the pack/unpack feature of the
i.map file generated by SimDataStudio for unstructured case file
generation. The unpacked input format writes full arrays to the
i.map file. Toggle the Write full size map arrays option ON to
generate an i.map file with the unpacked input format for
unstructured cases.

Note: The Write full size map arrays option works for unstructured
grid data sets only. For structured grid data sets, insert the
"NOVDBPACK" or "FULLMAPARRAYS" keyword in the grid
file to use the unpacked input format.

Print Options
These options define the array data that will be printed in the
simulation region output files.

Warning

Print options will generate large volumes of data.

Three different print options control processed initialization data

printing. The default is to print none of the data. You can select to print
all of the data. Or you can select and control individual print options.
You can also define the print format.

Perform the following steps to define print options:

1. Define tables and arrays to print. Click the No Print Card, Print
All or Print None toggle in the Processed Tables and Arrays field
to print all or none of the data within any/all of the groups. Note:
The Print None option will write your default print settings to the
initialization file. These settings will be commented out in the
simulation file. The No Print Card option will not write print
settings to the simulation file.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Output and Region Data 79

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Or click the toggle beside the specific groups to print in the

Individual Group Print Controls field. Then click the button
beside the group name to open the Print Option dialog box.

Click the plus (+) symbol beside a topic folder to open the
associated selection list. (Or click the minus (-) symbol to close it.)
Then click the check boxes to select the arrays.

Click +/- to open/close topic

folder

Red asterisk (*) symbol

indicates folder contains
selections

Click check box to select/

deselect option

Selection options will produce the following outputs:

Selection
All available options will print all of the
available options within the group,
regardless of your topic folder selections.

No options will print, regardless of your

topic folder selections.

Those available options NOT SELECTED

within the topic folders will print.

Available options exactly as selected

within the topic folders will print.

When you have selected all the print options, click OK to close the
Map Selection dialog box.

80 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Output and Region Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Individual Group Print Controls

Printing each individual group of data can be separately controlled by
directly specifying the group type and the desired information to be
printed.

Perform these steps to define group option:

1. Select the group type. Click the toggle beside the name of a group
type to activate the option.

2. Select the information. Click the click the button beside an

active group name to open the Print Option dialog box. Click the
plus (+) symbol beside a topic folder to open the associated
selection list. Click OK to close the dialog box.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Output and Region Data 81

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Print Format
Click the toggle to activate the following changes in print format:

1. Print by layer or cross-section. The default is to print the array

data by vertical layer. Click the Print by Cross-Section toggle to
to print the array data by cross-section instead of layer.

2. Print layer value in initialization region reports. The default is for

the initialization region reports to provide totals for each region.
Click the Print Layer Values in Initialization Region Reports
toggle to output layer values as well.

3. Print hydrocarbon pore/bulk volume tables. Click the Print the

Hydrocarbon Pore Volume and Bulk Volume Vs. Depth toggle
to cause three additional tables to be printed as a function of depth:
hydrocarbon pore volume, bulk volume, and cumulative bulk
volume.

Then click in the entry fields and enter the depth increment
(spacing of depths in the tables), and optional top depth.

82 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Output and Region Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Regions Definition
These options let you specify multiple output region groups for region
reports and for the assignment of surface batteries.

By default, the Nexus model has a single region group which includes
all the cells in the model. You can create additional region groups, each
containing multiple gridblocks that can be assigned particular region
names, separators, and PVT methods.

See the "Region Summaries" chapter of the Nexus User Guide for a
discussion of region groups.

Region Definitions

The region numbers that you define in the Output Data panel must correspond to
the gridblock region indices defined on the Grid Data Region Arrays panel. Refer
to “Other Arrays” on page 153.

Perform the following steps to define the region groups:

1. If desired, modify the name, separator method, and PVT method

for the default output region group. This region group is posted in
the Region Group list as "Output Regions + Extra Output
Regions."

a. Double click on the Name column to highlight the

default name. Key in a new name.

b. Click in the Separator Method column and select the

desired method from the pulldown menu.

c. Click in the PVT Method column and select the desired

PVT method.

2. If desired, add additional region groups.

a. Click on the Add new entry box below the Region

Group field.

The Nexus Region Group dialog box displays.

b. Specify the name of the IREGION array to which this

region group corresponds.

Important: If you have not yet created the array, a

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Output and Region Data 83

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

matching IREGION array for the group region will

automatically be created. You will need to assign
gridblocks to each of the regions in the region group.
You can do this by selecting the array from the Region
Arrays list (CORE Data -> Grid Related Data -> Grid
Arrays -> Region Arrays) and providing the necessary
gridblock i, j, k ranges.

c. Specify the number of regions in the group.

d. Click on OK.

The new regions are listed in the Region Group table

with region index numbers in the Number column and
the default names "1," "2," etc.

Note: The region numbers that appear in the Numbers

list correspond to the region index numbers of the
corresponding IREGION array.

Specify parameters for each of the regions as needed:

- Double click on the default name to highlight it. Key in

a new name.

- Click in the Separator Method column and select the

desired method from the pulldown menu.

- Click in the PVT Method column and select the

desired PVT method.

- Click in the Comments column and key in any

comments that you want to store with the region.

3. Repeat Step 2 for each new region group that you want to include
in the model.

Separator Definitions

You can accept the default surface separator (one stage, reservoir conditions equal
to surface conditions). However, to output surface volume based on a true field
separator model, you must first provide the separator information on the Surface
Separator Data tab of the Fluid Properties tree. Refer to “Define Separator
Batteries (K-Values Models and Compositional Models Only)” on page 142.

84 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Output and Region Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Fluid Reservoir Constants

Click the Fluid Reservoir Constants tab to define the constant

properties for the reservoir and its fluids.
Fluid Reservoir
Constants tab

This includes water properties, reservoir constants, and standard

conditions.

Thermal Reservoir Constants

Note that these options are different if you have selected the Thermal Reservoir
model under the Advanced options tree. Refer to “Reservoir Model” on page 89.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Fluid Reservoir Constants 85

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Water Properties
Water property parameters are mandatory unless you have selected the
thermal reservoir model. These options are not used in THERM. The
displayed units depend on your selection under the Units-Grid System
tab. Perform the following steps to complete the Water Properties
parameters:

1. Define method. Click to activate the toggle to activate water

properties across each reservoir, across the reservoir or across each
defined region according to salinity. If you select to activate water
properties by region, the following region parameters must be
completed:

e. Define stock tank water density. Click in the entry field

and enter the stock tank water density.

f. Define water formation volume factor. Click in the entry

field and enter the water formation volume factor at the
initial datum reservoir pressure for the first equilibrium
region.

g. Define water viscosity. Click in the entry field and enter

the water viscosity.

h. Define water compressibility. Click in the entry field and

enter the water compressibility.

Reservoir Constants
Reservoir constant parameters are mandatory. The displayed units
depend on your selection under the Units-Grid System tab. Perform the
following steps to complete the Reservoir Constants parameters:

1. Define rock compressibility. Click in the entry field and enter the
rock compressibility.

86 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Fluid Reservoir Constants R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

2. Define reservoir temperature. Click in the entry field and enter the
initial reservoir temperature.

Defining Temperature by Gridblock or Depth

If you have a Thermal or compositional model, you can define reservoir

temperature by depth or gridblock as described “Other Arrays” on
page 153. However, this field cannot be blank. Enter an arbitrary value if
you plan to use temperature vs. depth or values by gridblock.

Standard conditions
Standard condition displayed units depend on your selection under the
Units-Grid System tab. Perform the following steps to complete the
Standard Conditions parameters:

1. Define standard pressure. Click in the entry field and enter the
standard pressure.

Standard pressure default

The default is 14.65 psia (101.325 Kpa or 1.03353 kg/cm2.

2. Define standard temperature. Click in the entry field and enter the
standard temperature.

Standard temperature default

The default is 60oF (15oC).

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Fluid Reservoir Constants 87

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Dimension Data

The Nexus software does not require dimensions be set. If you are
defining parameters for the Nexus software only, you can ignore the
Dimension Data panel.

88 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Dimension Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Reservoir Model

These future options will let you to define advanced reservoir models.
For this release, only rock compaction can be specified.

Reservoir Model tab

1. Define rock compaction. This option lets you input pore volume
and permeability changes based on pressure history, water
saturation history or both.

Compaction Tables

When this option is selected, it activates the Compaction Tables option

under the Tables branch of the options tree as described in “Advanced
Reservoir Model Tables” on page 126.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Reservoir Model 89

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Perform the following steps to define the rock compaction option

parameters:

• Open the dialog box. Click the Details button that

displays when the Rock Compaction option is activated. The
corresponding dialog box opens as shown below.

• Select compaction table type. Click the toggle and select the
Compaction Table Type: pressure, water, or both.

• If you selected pressure or both, select calculation method.

Click the toggle to select the method of calculation. Activate
either Irreversible (use minimum pressure) or Reversible (use
current gridblock pressure).

90 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Reservoir Model R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Initialization Options

These options let you define advanced equilibrium and non-

equilibrium initializations.

Initialization Options tab

Click the toggles to activate the initialization options.

Initialization Type
The default initialization procedure is to always produce an equilibrium
system, which is to say that regardless of which input data options are
used, capillary pressure adjustments are computed for each gridblock
which will ensure that the phases are in equilibrium. Non-equilibrium
can be specified to deactivate the computation of the capillary pressure
adjustments.

• Use equilibrium initialization. Click the Equilibrium toggle if the

default equilibrium option is used. The adjustments are zero;

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Initialization Options 91

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

otherwise, small capillary pressure adjustments are calculated, and

remain constant for each of the gridblocks for the entire
simulation. The integrated saturation initialization options may
require small adjustments to capillary pressures in order to
maintain initial phase equilibrium.

• Use non-equilibrium initialization. Click the Non-Equilibrium

toggle to initialize at dynamic conditions by specifying
saturations, pressures, and possibly compositions, even though
there may be fluid movements at these initial conditions.

Initialization Algorithm
Click the toggle to select the initialization algorithm The default is
gridblock center initialization.

• Use gridblock center initialization. When the Gridblock Center

option is selected, the saturation distribution of the gridblock is
determined by the fluid located at the gridblock center.

• Use thickness center initialization. When the Thickness Center

option is selected, the thickness along the bedding plane is used to
calculate block properties. True vertical thickness is used to
calculate block properties; this more accurately represents dipping
reservoir blocks.

• Integrate capillary pressure over gridblock thickness. When the

Integrate Capillary Pressure over Gridblock Thickness option
is selected, initial fluid saturations are calculated based upon the
actual fluid distribution throughout the gridblock, by integrating
the capillary pressure on the block thickness.

Click the button located next to the activated field to select

optional values of modified residual oil and gas. The following
dialog box opens:

92 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Initialization Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Click the Perform Mobile Saturation Calculations toggle to

activate mobile calculations to account for initial contacts in some
blocks. This is especially useful for grids with large blocks
downdip, near the water-oil contact, where a small oil thickness
above the contact will contain mobile oil, while the oil saturation
is much less than residual oil saturation.

The default for minimum calculated residual oil and gas and
critical gas saturation is zero. Click in the entry field to change the
default minimum value.

• Integrate capillary pressure over gridblock volume. When the

Integrate Capillary Pressure over Gridblock Volume option is
selected, the volume averaged integrated saturation initialization
algorithm is invoked, where saturation values are calculated based
on the actual fluid distribution throughout the gridblock by
integrating the inverse capillary pressure function over the
gridblock volume.

This option allows calculations of average gridblock saturations

and bulk volume with specified approximation error tolerances.
Click the button located next to the activated field to select
optional values of modified residual oil and gas. The following
dialog box opens:

Default relative approximation error tolerances for initial water

and gas saturation and block bulk volume are 0.001. Click in the
entry fields to change these values. Block bulk volume is only
used for pore volume calculations.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Initialization Options 93

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Click to activate the Use Standard Mapping Technique toggle if

you do not want to update bulk volume. When active, DX . DY .
DX will be used for cornerpoint grids.

Vertical Equilibrium
The vertical equilibrium with completely segregated fluids may be
invoked for the water and oil phases, the gas and oil phases, or both.

Click to activate the Water-Oil and/or Gas-Oil option. When

activated, the Number of Sublayers to Divide Each Gridblock option
opens. The default value is 10. Click the up or down stepper arrow
located next to the field to increase or decrease the value.

Click to activate Directional Relative Permeability, which specifies

the calculations performed for vertical connections will use only a
fraction of the cell height as specified by the Fraction of Gridblock
for effective saturation value.

94 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Initialization Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Grid Input Options

These options let you turn off or define tolerances by which

connections across pinchouts and faults are made and barriers are
created for low pore-volume gridblocks.
Grid Input Options tab

Click the toggles to activate the grid input options.

Offband Connections
By default, non-standard gridblock connections between layers of the
grid system where pinchouts occur are generated automatically

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Grid Input Options 95

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

whenever two layers are separated by one or more inactive blocks if the
total thickness separating them is less than tolerance.

Inactive blocks

Except for the thermal model, a block is inactive whenever pore volume = 0.
When the thermal model is used, a block with zero pore volume or zero total
volume are considered inactive.

By default, faults are connected only when they are logically vertical
blocks.

• Turn off generation of pinchout and/or fault connections. Activate

the Turn off Generation of Pinchout Connections toggle or the
Turn off Generation of Pinchout and Fault Connections to turn
off the default of automatic generation.

• Generate fault connections across any gridblock. Activate the

Generate Fault Connections Across Any Gridblock on the
other side of the Fault Plane toggle to calculate both lateral and
vertical connections.

• Change pinchout connection tolerance. Click the button

located next to the Tolerances for pinchout connections field to
specify tolerances for automatic pinchout connection. The
following dialog box opens.

Enter the following:

• Gridblock net thickness tolerance. Pore volume is set to zero

for blocks with a net thickness less than or equal to this value.
Default is zero.

• Interblock gross thickness tolerance. A block is “pinched-out”

if it is inactive, or if the gross thickness between two active

96 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Grid Input Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

gridblocks is less than or equal to this value. The default is the

gridblock net thickness tolerance value.

• Gridblock gross thickness tolerance. Total volume and pore

volume are set to zero for blocks with a gross thickness is less
than or equal to this value. The default is the gridblock net
thickness tolerance value.

Tolerance for Individual Grids

• Specify pore volume cut-off .

Toggle ON the Specify pore-volume cutoff check button.

Click the button located next to the activated field to open the
following dialog box.

For each active grid, click in the PV Cutoff entry field and enter
the value. The simulator will set blocks with pore volumes less
than or equal to this value to zero.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Grid Input Options 97

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

• Specify LGRs to check separately for pinchout. (This option is

only available for grids that have LGRs defined.)

By default grid refinements are inactive only if the parent

gridblock is inactive.

Toggle ON the Specify Grids to Check Pinchout check button.

Click the button located to the right of the field.

The following dialog box opens.

Click the check box beside any grid refinement you want tested
separately against the tolerance for pinchout connection.

98 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Grid Input Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Pore Volume and Transmissibility Calculations

These options set optional parameters for calculating pore volume and
transmissibility in corner point grids. Corner point grids allow you to
describe more general grid systems than those describable through the
specification of block-size arrays only.

Perform the following steps to define the pore volume and

transmissibility options:

1. Define the transmissibility calculation parameters. Click the

button located next to the Transmissibility Calculation
Options field. The calculation dialog box opens. Define the
parameters as follows:

Type of calculation The default method for calculation of

(“harmonic,” inter-block transmissibilities is a
“according to previ- method based on harmonic integration.
ous VIP version,” and This has been found to give a more
“according to default accurate representation of transmissibil-
in VIP V98.” ities for corner-point grids. This was not
the default in previous versions of the
VIP software. Previous default can also
be invoked.
Specify corner point Click the toggle to invoke this option.
positions along depth
lines
x/y/z direction Number of quadrature points (1 . iquads
. 3) in the x, y, and z directions.

Click OK to close the dialog box.

2. Define whether to use the DX, DY, and DZ arrays for root grid
pore volume and transmissibility calculation. Toggle this option
on if you want to use the DX, DY, and DZ arrays for the
calculation.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Grid Input Options 99

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Cornerpoint Options
1. Define the gridblock connection tolerance parameters. Click the
button located next to the Gridblock Connection Generation
Tolerances field. The tolerance dialog box opens. Define the
parameters as follows:

Relative overlap area Tolerance for relative overlap area for

for corner point faults corner-point faults.
Absolute transmissi- Tolerance for absolute transmissibility
bility cutoff for corner cutoff for cornerpoint faults, rb-cp/day/
point faults psi (cm-cp/day/kPa).
Cutoff to zero grid- Tolerance for pore volume cutoff. Pore
block pore volume volumes in cells with calculated values
less than this value are set to zero.
Cutoff to zero inter- Tolerance for determining if corner
gridblock vertical point gridblock corner points are in ver-
transmissibility tical contact. If the difference in depth
between the corner points at the top of
layer and the bottom of layer is less than
this value, it is assumed the layers are in
contact and a non-zero z-direction
transmissibility is calculated.

Click OK to close the dialog box.

2. Define data checking. The program automatically checks to make

sure that each face of each gridblock projects as a convex
quadrilateral on to an average plane “parallel” to the face. Faces
that fail the convexity condition are checked for the angle between
each of the pair of opposite sides. If any angle is larger than 90
degrees a warning message is printed. The check is performed
initially excluding blocks with zero porosity. After the pore
volume has been calculated the check is repeated for blocks with
non-zero pore volume. By default, the program checks that x
coordinates of corner points do not decrease with increasing i
index.

100 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Grid Input Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Click the button located next to the Data Checking Options

field. The tolerance dialog box opens. Define the parameters as
follows:

Print warning mes- The maximum number of blocks for

sage which detailed warning messages are
printed when convexity and angle con-
ditions are violated.
Do not check that X No checking of x coordinate increasing
coordinates increase order.
with i index
Do not check that Y No checking of y coordinate decreasing
coordinates increase order.
with j index

Click OK to close the dialog box.

3. Specify right-handed coordinates. Left or right handedness

conflict when importing grids from the PowerGrid™ software into
the SimDataStudio software. Click the button located next to
the Right Handed Coordinates field to specify a grid imported
from the PowerGrid software if this option is not already specified
within the User Options panel.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: Grid Input Options 101

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

EOS-PVT Options

These options let you deactivate black-oil table monotonicity and

hydrocarbon compressibility checking and activate PVT interpolation.

EOS-PVT Options tab

102 Defining Initialization Utility Data: EOS-PVT Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Click the toggles to activate the EOS-PVT options. Complete the

following information:

CSORM Click to activate the miscible displace-

ment option. When active it sets aside a
portion of the residual oil that cannot be
recovered in compositional processes.
Without this option, it is possible for all
the oil in a gridblock to be recovered
through vaporization and/or displace-
ment.

R5000.0.1 Defining Initialization Utility Data: EOS-PVT Options 103

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

104 Defining Initialization Utility Data: EOS-PVT Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Initialization Data

Introduction

The Nexus® software can initialize multiple reservoirs (called

"equilibrium regions") within the same model. Initialization data
includes all data necessary to define the equilibrium region tables.

Double-click on the Initialization Data icon . The related entry pane

opens. Each option is described in detail.

Equilibrium Region Index

When you define the initialization (equilibrium) regions, you will define the associated
gridblock ranges within the Region Arrays branch of the Grid Data tree. Refer to “Other
Arrays” on page 153.

R5000.0.1 Initialization Data: Introduction 105

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Initial PVT Conditions

Perform the following steps to define the initial PVT conditions:

1. Define reservoir pressure. Click in the Reservoir Pressure and At

Depth entry fields and enter the initial reservoir pressure (psia
(kPa)) and corresponding depth.

2. Define reservoir temperature for the region. Click in the

Reservoir Temperature entry field and enter the initial reservoir
temperature in the equilibrium region, degrees F (degrees C).

Exceptions

For Gas-Water, Water-Oil, and Enhanced Black Oil fluid models, a default
temperature is posted but not used.

106 Initialization Data: Initial PVT Conditions R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Phase Contact

The phase contact display depends on the fluid model you have
selected. Perform the following steps to enter the phase contacts.

1. Specify capillary pressure. Click in the entry field and enter the
capillary pressure at the model-dependent contact.

For black oil, enhanced black oil, compositional, and K-Values

fluid models, enter the water-oil and gas-oil capillary pressure at
water-oil and gas-oil contact, psia (kPa), where pcwoc = po - pw.

For Gas-Water fluid models, enter the gas-water capillary

pressure, psia (kPa), where pcgw = pg - pw.

2. Specify contact depth. Contact depth can be define in one of two

ways:

a. Enter the value in the corresponding Contact Depth

entry field.

b. Slide the Depth Bar along the Grid Display as shown

below. The depth dynamically updates in the
corresponding Contact Depth entry field.

Grid Depth Bar

R5000.0.1 Initialization Data: Phase Contact 107

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Initial Saturation Pressure

The saturation and compositional pressure entries that display in the

Initialization pane depend on the fluid model you have selected.

Constants
Perform the following steps to define constants.

1. Enter saturation pressure. Click in the Saturation Pressure entry

field and enter the initial saturation pressure, psia (kPa).

2. Enter component mole fraction (compositional and K-values fluid

models only). Click the button beside the main phase (the Oil
Phase Composition and/or Gas Phase Composition) field. The
Component Mole Fractions dialog box opens to display the
hydrocarbon components you specified for the compositional or
K-values fluid model. Enter the component mole fractions as
shown below.

Click OK to close the dialog box. The values you specified

transfer to the display field.

Mole Fractions

Mole fraction values must equal 1.

108 Initialization Data: Initial Saturation Pressure R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Activate VIP® method for compositional models (optional). Click

to activate the Use VIP Method for Phase Composition toggle if
you want to match VIP pressure results by using the same method
during phase pressure vs. depth table construction.

If this toggle is not active, the program adopts the same

compositional assumptions during table build as are applied later
during gridblock composition assignment. This results in
discrepancies when compared to VIP results, but may reduce non-
equilibrium potentials after initialization.

3. Activate super-critical initialization for compositional fluid model

(optional). Click to activate the Super-critical Initialization
toggle for compositional models in which the fluid type transitions
from undersaturated gas to undersaturated liquid as depth
increases. Fluids above this “undersaturated GOC” condition
exhibit a dew point while exhibiting a bubble point below it. At
undersaturated GOC, the reservoir temperature is equal to the
mixture’s critical temperature, and the reservoir pressure exceeds
the critical pressure.

Activate Gibbs sedimentation for compositional fluid model

(optional). Click to activate the Gibbs Sedimentation for Comp.
vs. Depth toggle if you want to use the Gibbs sedimentation
method to calculate compositional variation for depths greater than
or equal to 100 feet. This option can produce significant
compositional variation if the depth variation of a reservoir is
appreciable.

R5000.0.1 Initialization Data: Initial Saturation Pressure 109

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Varying by Depth
Click the Depth Varying toggle to activate the applicable equilibrium
tables. For saturation tables, enter the values in the Depth and PSAT
fields as shown in the saturation table below.

For different phases of an enhanced black oil model, you will have
toggles for additional oil-gas or gas-oil ratios. In the live oil/wet gas
model shown below, the selected option is to use solution gas ration
instead of saturation.

For K-value and compositional models, you have an optional toggle to

specify temperature at each depth, additional (mandatory) fields to
specify component mole fractions for the main phase, and a super-
critical initialization toggle as shown below.

110 Initialization Data: Initial Saturation Pressure R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

The options available for each fluid model are:

Fluid Model Constants Optional Equilibrium Tables vs. Depth

Black Oil Saturation Pressure Saturation Pressure

Gas-Water none none
Water-Oil Saturation Pressure none
Enhanced Black
Oil
live oil /dry Saturation Pressure Saturation pressure OR solution gas-oil ratio
gas
live oil/wet Saturation Pressure Saturation pressure OR solution gas-oil AND oil-
gas gas ratio
dead oil/dry Saturation Pressure Solution gas-oil ratio
gas
dead oil/wet Saturation Pressure Saturation pressure OR solution oil-gas ratio
gas
K-Values Saturation pressure Saturation pressure (with optional temperature)
and component and MANDATORY component mole fractions for
mole fraction for main phasea,2
main phase1,b
Compositional Saturation pressure Saturation pressure (with optional temperature)
and component and MANDATORY component mole fractions for
mole fraction for main phasea,b
main phasea,b
1. Main phase is gas above the gas-oil contact and oil below.
2. You can invoke super-critical initialization to initialize fluid systems which are always one phase but
are gas condensate overlaying volatile oils. The compositions are such that they are always above the
equilibrium two phase envelope at the reservoir temperature and pressure. The gas-oil contact is
defined by looking at the heaviest component k-value to insure it is less than one because there is no
two phase region in the reservoir at initial conditions. The initial reservoir pressure/depth values are
used as the starting point for the initial pressure profile calculations.

Initial Salinity
Define the actual salinity in a given region of a reservoir., If you have two
initialization regions with different salinities that use the same water pvt, the
simulator will then use the value of the salinity in each region to calculate the water
pvt.

R5000.0.1 Initialization Data: Initial Saturation Pressure 111

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

If you have selected to vary saturation pressure by depth, a

corresponding salinity value can be defined.

112 Initialization Data: Initial Saturation Pressure R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Region Management

The Region Management options let you specify and manage multiple
initialization regions in the reservoir. The Region Management options
are located on the bottom of the Initialization Data pane.

Add Region Pane

Perform the following step to add a pane for each region you want to
define.

1. On the Initialization Data pane, click the down arrow icon

beside the Region Management field and select the Add New
Region option from the drop-down menu as shown below.

Add new region

The region number increments in the Initialization Regions field

as shown below.

A corresponding blank Region Definition pane is created for the

new region.

Add/Edit Region Description and Comments

Perform the following steps to add or edit an existing description and
comments for the region.

1. Click the down arrow icon beside the Region Management

field and select the Edit Description and Comments option from
the drop-down menu as shown below.

Edit description

R5000.0.1 Initialization Data: Region Management 113

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

The Description and Comments dialog box opens as shown below.

2. Click in the Description field and enter a short description. Click

in the Comments field and enter comments about the region.
Click the OK button to close the dialog box.

When the User Comments option is active on the Data File

Generation tab of the User Options panel (View > User Options),
then the description and comments entered here will print in the
output file.

Select Region Pane

Select regions by clicking the stepper arrows or select from the drop-
down menu as shown below.
Active Open
First region menu Last

Previous Next

Once selected, you can complete the entry fields for the active region.

114 Initialization Data: Region Management R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Delete Region Pane

With the region pane active, perform the following step to delete a
region.

1. Click the down arrow icon beside the Region Management

field and select the Delete Region option from the drop-down
menu as shown below.

Delete region

The region is deleted and the region numbers increment

consecutively. Any data you have entered for the region is deleted.

R5000.0.1 Initialization Data: Region Management 115

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

116 Initialization Data: Region Management R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Defining Table Data

Introduction

Table data consists of initialization (equilibrium), rock property, and

fluid property definitions. These options share common user interface
procedures for setting up regions, building and importing, and editing
tables or optional correlation curve definitions. Common procedures
are described first. Then, individual table definitions are described for
initialization, rock, and fluid properties.

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: Introduction 117

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

General Tasks

Building Tables
When building equilibrium or property tables, the right mouse button
menu options let you build the rows as shown below.

Click in a row with the right mouse button and select to:

• Insert Before Row. Insert a new row above the current row.

• Insert After Row. Insert a new row below the current row.

• Delete Row. Delete the current row.

• Set Row Number. Opens a dialog box from which you can click the
up or down stepper arrow to define the total number of rows for
the table (including the current ones). Additional rows are added to
the bottom of the table.

Defining Tables
There are two ways to define tables:

• Import an existing table from an initialization file, text file, or

spreadsheet (or extension file for PVT tables).

• Define the curve correlation

Procedures for importing tables are described in this section.

Procedures for defining curve correlations are described by fluid model
in the next section.

118 Defining Table Data: General Tasks R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Importing Tables
Important: When importing table data from existing Nexus® data,
select the .fcs file, not the .dat file. For example, if you are importing
relative permeability table data, import it from the project’s .fcs file
rather than the project relpm.dat file. If you attempt to import from the
relpm.dat file, an error message will state that no data of the proper
format exists in the file. This error occurs because the import option
requires the VIP® data format when importing from a .dat file.

Perform the following steps to import an existing table:

1. Open the Select File dialog box. With the rock properties region
active, click the Import from File button located at the bottom of
the pane.

The Select file dialog box opens as shown below.

2. Select the file. Click the Files of Type drop-down menu and select
the format of the file to import. Then filter and select the file.
When you click OK, the dialog box closes. If the initialization file

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: General Tasks 119

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

contains multiple tables, the Table Import Selection dialog box

opens as shown below.

Available
tables

3. Select the table. Click on the table name in the list of available
tables to display the corresponding curves. Click the OK button
when the table you want to select is highlighted.

The table data is imported and the corresponding curves display.

View and Edit Tables

Once a table is populated, you can click in any field to edit the data. Or
you can move your pointer within the curve display as shown below.

Corresponding table entry

Values

At each pointer position, the corresponding values are annotated on the

curve display and the corresponding table entry field is highlighted.

120 Defining Table Data: General Tasks R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

You can click and drag any point to edit the curve. When you press
your right mouse button, your pointer becomes an up or down arrow
( ). Drag the arrow to the new value and release MB1. The curve and
the corresponding table entries are updated.

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: General Tasks 121

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Rock Property Tables

The Nexus software can initialize multiple rock property regions.

Click the (+) button beside Rock Property Tables on the options tree.
Then double-click on the rock property icon beside the table to
select. The related entry pane opens.

Rock property table options depend on the fluid model you have
selected. Each option is described in detail.

Rock Type Region Index

When you define the rock property regions, you will define the associated gridblock ranges
within the Region Arrays branch of the Grid Data tree. Refer to “Other Arrays” on
page 153.

122 Defining Table Data: Rock Property Tables R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Water-Oil Table
Water saturation tables define the rock properties that depend on water
saturation: relative permeability of water, relative permeability of oil in
the presence of water, and water-oil capillary pressure.

The following fields must be defined in the Water-Oil Saturation table:

Column Name Description

SW Water saturation as a fraction of total pore volume. Values must
increase consecutively.
KRW Relative permeability of water (in an oil-water system) at a given
water saturation. Values must increase with water saturation.
KROW Relative permeability of oil in the presence of water (in an oil-
water system) at a given water saturation. Values must decrease
with increasing water saturation. If this is an imbibition table,
krow must be less than or equal to the corresponding drainage
curve value.
PCWO Water-oil capillary pressure, psia (kPa). Values must decrease
with increasing water saturation unless all values are equal. This
will either be a primary drainage curve or an imbibition curve. If
this is an imbibition table, pcwo must be less than or equal to the
corresponding secondary drainage curve value. Here, pcwo = po
- pw.

Creating a Water-Oil Table Using a Corey Model

One method of defining a water-oil table is to define a Corey model
that constructs the table using a set of correlations.

Perform the following steps to create the table using a Corey model:

1. Click on the Correlation button.

2. Define endpoints. Click in the entry fields and enter values for:

• Connate water saturation (mandatory)

• Oil relative permeability at connate water saturation

(mandatory)

• Residual oil saturation (mandatory)

• Water relative permeability at residual oil saturation

(mandatory)

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: Rock Property Tables 123

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

• Capillary pressure and maximum capillary pressure (optional)

3. Define curves shape. Click in the Exponent entry fields and enter
the gas (mandatory), water (mandatory), and capillary pressure
exponents to define the shape of the curve.

4. Define number of table entries. Click the up or down stepper arrow

beside the Number of Entries in Table field to define the total
number of point along the curve to be calculated.

5. Click on Generate.

Gas-Oil Table (Gas-Oil Fluid Model)

The following fields must be defined in the Gas-Oil Saturation table:

Column Name Description

SG Gas saturation as a fraction of total pore volume. Values must
increase consecutively.
KRG Relative permeability of gas (in a gas-oil system) at a given gas
saturation. Values must increase with gas saturation.
KROG Relative permeability of oil in the presence of gas (in a gas-oil
system) at a given gas saturation. Values must decrease with
increasing gas saturation.
PCGO Gas-oil capillary pressure, psia (kPa). Values must increase with
increasing gas saturation unless all values are equal.
(pcgo = pg - po).

Creating a Gas-Oil Table Using a Corey Model

One method of defining a gas-oil table is to define a Corey model that
constructs the table using a set of correlations.

Perform the following steps to create the table using a Corey model:

1. Click on the Correlation button.

2. Define endpoints. Click in the entry fields and enter values for:

• Residual oil saturation (mandatory)

• Maximum gas relative permeability (mandatory)

• Critical gas saturation (mandatory)

124 Defining Table Data: Rock Property Tables R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

• Capillary pressure and maximum capillary pressure

3. Define curves shape. Click in the Exponent entry fields and enter
the gas (mandatory), oil (mandatory), and capillary pressure
exponents to define the shape of the curve.

4. Define number of table entries. Click the up or down stepper arrow

beside the Number of Entries in Table field to define the total
number of point along the curve to be calculated.

5. Click on Generate.

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: Rock Property Tables 125

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Advanced Reservoir Model Tables

The following tables activate when advanced reservoir model options
are defined.

Table Option Column Description

Rock CompactionTable Pressure History P Pressure (PSIA)
Water Saturation History DSW Change in water saturation
PVMULT Pore volume multipliers
TAMULT Transmissibility multipliers
TVMULT Vertical transmissibility
multipliers (optional)

126 Defining Table Data: Rock Property Tables R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Relative Permeability Tables

The Saturation Table Parameters panel at the bottom of the Relative

Permeability Tables pane lets you define relative permeability,
capillary pressure, end-point scaling, and vertical equilibrium.

Scroll to the bottom of the Relative Permeability Tables pane to access

the Relative Permeability and Capillary Pressure options.

Click the ellipse button to open the dialog box.

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: Relative Permeability Tables 127

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Options are described in the table below.

Option Description

Relative KRG, KROW, or water transition hysteresis (KRW). You

Permeability can set the activation value for hysteresis vs. historical phase
saturation You can also set the activation value for KRG
hysteresis vs. when maximum historical phase saturation is
above critical gas saturation.

Capillary Use Leverett J-function for calculation of capillary pressure:

Pressure
• KX
• KY
• Permbasis
• Porbasis
Use water-oil capillary pressure hysteresis.

128 Defining Table Data: Relative Permeability Tables R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Fluid Property Tables

The Nexus software can initialize multiple fluid property regions. The
available fluid property tables will vary depending on the fluid model
that you have selected for the current SimDataStudio™ case.

Click the (+) button beside Fluid Property Tables on the options tree.
Then double-click on the PVT Tables icon beside the table to select.
The related entry pane opens.

PVT table options depend on the fluid model you have selected. Each
option is described in detail.

PVT Region Index

When you define the fluid property regions, you will define the associated gridblock ranges
within the Region Arrays branch of the Grid Data tree. Refer to “Other Arrays” on page 153.

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables 129

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

PVT Table Definitions

Water PVT
Temperature variations are established as shown in the diagram below.

Activate the Temperature

Dependency toggle. Enter or
use stepper to select the

The corresponding number

of tabbed panels are created

Enter the temperature and

corresponding water PVT
data

Water PVT can be specified as follows:

Column
Description
Name

SALINT Salinity of water (user units). These values should be monotonically

increasing.
DWB Density of stock tank water at standard conditions (lb/ft3, kg/m3, kg/m3,
kg/m3, gm/cc).
BWI Water formation volume factor at reference pressure (RB/STB, m3/m3,
m3/m3, m3/m3, cc/cc).

130 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Column
Description
Name

CW Water compressibility (1/psia, 1/kPa, 1/(Kg/cm2), 1/bars, 1/psia).

VW Water viscosity at reference pressure (cp, cp, cp, cp, cp).
VWP Derivative of water viscosity with respect to pressure. (cp/psia, cp/kPa,
cp/(Kg/cm2), cp/bar, cp/psia).
PBASEW Reference pressure.

Salinity Tracking
Salinity tracking requires three types of input data. Perform the
following steps:

1. Initial salinity. Enter the initial salinity on the Initialization panel.

(This value can vary by depth.) Refer to “Initial Salinity” on
page 111.

2. Water PVT salinity. Specify the water PVT salinity with the
corresponding values as described in the table above. Refer to
“Water PVT” on page 130

3. Injection water salinity. For each well, specify the injection water
salinity value on the Well Constraints panel. This entry is used to
calculate the STREAM_TRACER and TRACER values. Refer to
“Viewing/Editing Well Constraints” on page 332.

Note: You can also directly enter stream tracer data directly into
the .fcs file. Refer to the Nexus Keyword Document.

Differential Expansion Tables

Depending on the fluid model you selected, the following fields must
be defined in the differential expansion table:

Column
Description
Name

Black-Oil PVT
PSAT Values of saturation pressure at successive pressure steps in the
differential expansion experiment, psia (kPa). These values must be
monotonically decreasing.
RS Values of solution gas-oil ratio corresponding to each value of psat,
SCF/STB (SCM/STCM).

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables 131

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Column
Description
Name

BO Values of oil formation volume factor corresponding to each value of

psat, rb/STB (cm/STCM).
BG Values of gas formation volume factor corresponding to each value of
psat, rb/STB (cm/STCM).
GR Values of gas gravity corresponding to each value of psat. Values are
measured as density relative to air at standard conditions.
VO Values of saturated oil viscosity corresponding to each value of psat, cp
(cp).
VG Values of gas viscosity corresponding to each value of psat, cp (cp).
Enhanced Black-Oil PVT
PSAT, RS, BO, and VO defined above (live oil). PSAT, BO, and VO defined above
(dead oil).
Oil PVT
RS, PSAT, BO and VO defined above.
Gas PVT
PSAT, BG am VG defined above.
K Values Black-Oil PVT
PSAT, VG am VO defined above.
ZG Values of gas compressibility factor (z-factor) corresponding to each
value of psat.
ZO Values of oil compressibility factor (z-factor) corresponding to each
value of psat.
YNC Values of gas mole fraction of the last (nc) component corresponding to
each value of psat.
KV-N K-values for each component (N) corresponding to each value of psat.

Fluid Model Correlation Curves

Perform the following steps to define the fluid model correlation
curves:

1. Define correlations for differential expansion data. The data you

define is dependent on the fluid model. Procedures are defined
separately below.

2. Define density/molecular weight. This information must be

defined whether you are importing the table or defining the
correlations. Refer to See “Define Surface Density” on page 134.

132 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

3. Define the required fields in the saturated data. This information

must be defined whether you are importing the table or defining
the correlations.

Black Oil and Water-Oil PVT Curve Correlation

Perform the following steps to enter black oil PVT curve data:

1. Define PVT conditions. Click in the entry fields and enter values
for:

• API gravity of the residual oil at standard conditions

(mandatory).

• Fluid gas-oil ratio (mandatory).

• Gas gravity (mandatory).

• Fluid temperature (mandatory).

2. Define separator conditions. Click in the entry fields and enter

separator temperature and pressure.

Defining Separator Batteries

Within the SimDataStudio software, you can define separator batteries only
if you have selected the compositional fluid model. These entry fields
assume only a surface separator. However, you can edit the initialization file
and manually add separator batteries.

3. Define number of table entries above and below bubble point.

Click the up or down stepper arrow beside the Entries Above/
Below Bubble Point fields to define the total number of point
along the curve to be calculated.

4. Generate the correlations. Click the Generate button located at

the bottom of the Correlations dialog box. The bubble point is
calculated and displayed at the bottom of the dialog box. Click the
Close button to close the dialog box.

Gas-Water PVT Curve Correlation

Perform the following steps to enter gas-water curve data:

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables 133

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

1. Define Fluid PVT conditions. Click in the entry fields and enter
values for:

• Gas Gravity (mandatory)

• Temperature (mandatory)

2. Define separator conditions. Click in the entry fields and enter

separator temperature and pressure.

Defining Separator Batteries

Within the SimDataStudio software, you can define separator batteries only
if you have selected the compositional fluid model. Unless you plan to edit
the initialization file manually to add separator batteries, these entry fields
assume only a surface separator.

3. Define number of table entries above and below bubble point.

Click the up or down stepper arrow beside the Entries Above/
Below Bubble Point fields to define the total number of point
along the curve to be calculated.

4. Generate the correlations. Click the Generate button located at the

bottom of the Correlations dialog box. The bubble point is
calculated and displayed at the bottom of the dialog box. Click the
Close button to close the dialog box.

Define Surface Density

Perform the following steps to enter density and molecular weight data.

Gas-Water Fluid Model

With the Gas-Water fluid model, you can only define gas gravity.

1. Define displayed fields (mandatory). Click in the Density of

Residual Oil at Standard Conditions and Molecular Weight of
Residual Oil entry fields and enter the values.

Imports

If you have imported a table, all density/molecular weight data in the table
is imported and displays.

134 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

2. Open optional fields. Click the Other Options button as shown

below.

The Options dialog box opens.

3. Select options. Click the plus (+) symbol beside the Density and
Molecular Weight topic folder to open the associated selection
list. (Or click the minus (-) symbol to close it.) Then click the
check boxes to select the parameters as shown below.

Click +/- to open/close

topic folder (Red
asterisk (*) symbol
indicates folder contains
selections)

Click check box to select/

deselect parameter

Click the OK button to close the dialog box. The selected

parameters display as on the pane so you can enter values.

Define Undersaturated Data

Perform the following steps to provide the undersaturated data
definitions:

1. Define saturation pressure. Click in the Saturation Pressure

entry field and enter the value. You can click the down arrow icon
and select the value from a list of those entered for previous
regions. Values entered in the table described below will be
relative to this saturation pressure.

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables 135

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

2. Complete the table. The following fields must be defined in the

Undersaturated Data table:

Column Name Description

DP Values of pressure relative to the saturation pressure.

BOFAC Values of oil formation volume factor at pressure p relative to the
volume factor at pressure psat. [bo(p)/bo(psat)].
VOFAC Values of oil viscosity at pressure p relative to the viscosity at
pressure psat. [vo(p)/vo(psat)].

136 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

EOS Data Tables (Compositional Models)

For compositional models, you can define the equation of state data for
both reservoirs and separator batteries.

Procedures are described below.

Reservoir EOS
Perform the following steps to define reservoir EOS data.

1. Select EOS type. Click the down arrow next to the Equation of
State Type field and select the type from the pull down menu.
Available methods are: Peng Robinson (modified), original Peng-
Robinson, Redlich-Kwong, Soave-Redlich-Kwong, and
Zudkevitch-Joffe.

2. Activate volume shift option. Click to activate the Use 3

Parameter Version of EOS toggle if you want to add the volume
(VSHIFT) option to the Component Properties table.

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables 137

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

3. Select optional parameters (the Nexus software only). Click the

selection button next to the Optional Parameters field to open
a dialog box on which you can define the following parameters:

Parameter Definition

Tolerance and Calculation Method

Flash Tolerance The flash calculation converges when

nc
⎛ 1 – f------
Σ
2
v, i⎞
- < TOL
⎝ f ⎠
l, i
i =1
where nc is the number of hydrocarbon components.
(Default 1.0e-4)

Z-Factor Lowest Gibbs Click the toggle to activate the Z-factor selection
Free Energy option process by which the Z-factor that provides the
lowest Gibbs free energy for the phase is selected.
Normally, this option is off, and the lowest Z-factor is
selected for the liquid phase, and the largest Z-factor
is selected for the vapor phase

Number of Components The default is nc (the number of hydrocarbon

for Fugacity Equality components). Adjusting this option may be useful if
Convergence Criteria resolution of the fugacity equality of trace
components is slowing the convergence of the flash
calculations.

Ignore VSHIFT Input in Activate this toggle to cause the simulator to ignore
Component Properties VSHIFT input in the EOS Component Properties
Table option Table.

Ignore STKATZ Input in Activate this toggle to cause the simulator to ignore
Component Properties SKATZ input in the EOS Component Properties
Table option Table.

Phase Transition

Method to Detect Click the arrow and select the method from the pull-
Transition from 1-phase down menu. Options are:
to 2-phase state • INCRP: determined by increasing pressure
method.
• GIBB: determined by Gibbs stability test.
• PSAT: determined by saturation pressure test.

138 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Parameter Definition

Calculation Method for Click the arrow and select the method from the pull-
Phase Transitions down menu the method controlling how phase
transition calculations are performed. Options are:
• Neighbor: all single phase grid blocks which
neighbor a two phase grid block (except well grid
blocks) will use K-values from the neighbor block
as the starting point to test for the emergence of a
second phase.
• Test: all single phase grid blocks which neighbor a
two phase grid block, and all well grid blocks, will
undergo a test for the emergence of a second phase.
• All: all single phase grid blocks are tested for the
emergence of a second phase using the increasing
pressure method.

Phase Fraction Enter the phase fraction in the entry field. The second
increasing loop is entered if the first loop fails on the
last increment and the mole phase fraction is within
PHASEFRAC of the phase boundary.

Test Threshold Enter in the entry field the value for applying the
phase transition test when two adjacent blocks are of
difference single phase types.

Phase Labeling

Single Phase Click the pull-down menu and select the option for
Hydrocarbon System determining the labeling of a single phase
Labeling for hydrocarbon system during initialization
Initialization calculations. Options are:
• OIL: Always label a single phase hydrocarbon as
oil,
• GAS: Always label a single phase hydrocarbon as
gas.
• V: Label a single phase, depending on the vapor
mole fraction obtained from the flash calculation.
(Default)

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables 139

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Parameter Definition

Criteria to Label Single- • Click the pull-down menu to select the single-phase
Phase Hydrocarbon hydrocarbon system: Options are:
System
• PREVIOUS: Use label applied during previous
timestep. (Default)
• DENSITY: Base label on whether the mass density
of a phase is above or below the specified threshold
value. Fluids with density above the threshold
value are labeled as oil, while fluids with density
below the threshold value are labeled as gas.
• FLASH: Base the phase label on the vapor mole
fraction calculated from a set of increasing pressure
flash calculations.
• OIL: Always label a single phase fluid as an oil.
• GAS: Always label a single phase fluid as a gas.
• PSAT: Label a single phase fluid based on the
result of a saturation pressure calculation. A bubble
point fluid is labeled as an oil, while a dew point
fluid is labeled as a gas.

CO2 Data

Specify CO2 This option lets you specify a component. Click the
Component Number up arrow to increase the value from 0 (default) to 1.

Critical Volume Click in the entry field and enter a critical volume
Correction Factor for correction factor applied to CO2 during Thodos
Viscosity Calculation viscosity calculation.

4. Select component properties critical temperature and pressure

units. Click the down arrow next to the Critical Temperature
Unit and Critical Pressure Unit fields and select the units from
the pull-down menu.

140 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

5. Enter component properties. Click in the entry fields and define

the component properties within the table:

Parameter Definition

MW Value of oil molecular weight corresponding

to oil viscosity parameter.
TC Critical temperature.
PC Critical pressure.
ZC Critical gas compressibility factor.
Acentric Acentric factor of component
OmegaA Equation of state factor for each component
OmegaB
VSHIFT Volume shift value. (This column is avail-
able only if the Volume Shift toggle is
active.)

6. Define binary interaction coefficients. Click in the table entry

fields and enter the binary interaction coefficient terms a and b
(click toggle to specify) between the first and second component.

Other Parameters
You can specify that you want viscosity to the modeled with either
Pedersen correlations or the Lohrenz-Bray-Clark correlation.

The Pedersen viscosity correlations are based on the law of

corresponding states. Its parameters have been adjusted to fit the
viscosity of a large set of reservoir oils over a range of conditions.
Some oil viscosity behaviors may be described better by the Pedersen
correlations than the standard Lohrenz-Bray-Clark (LBC) correlation.
Many users prefer to use the Pedersen correlations when simulating
heavier oils.

Separator EOS
The EOS separator options are all described within the Reservoir EOS
section (refer to “Reservoir EOS” on page 137.)

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables 141

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Note that you can activate or deactivate the Use Reservoir Equation
of State toggle to either duplicate the settings from the previous panel
or define new ones for the separator.

Define Separator Batteries (K-Values Models and Compositional

Models Only)
Important: The Nexus software does not currently support K-values. If
you define K-value parameters, they will be used only for VIP data sets
that you generate with the SimDataStudio software.

For K-values models and compositional models, you have the option to
define the separator batteries.

Surface battery table

Surface battery design

Battery regions are defined as described in “Region Management” on

page 113. The definition table is built as described in “Defining Tables”
on page 118.

For each stage, enter the following data:

Parameter Description

TEMP Temperature at current stage

142 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Parameter Description

PRES Pressure at current stage

LFRAC Fraction of liquid steam entering the stage (LFRAC1)

and leaving the stage (LFRAC2) to be sent to the
destination. The value of liquid steam entering and
leaving the stage (LFRAC1 + LFRAC2) must be
between 0 and 1.

LDEST Destination can be the oil sales line (OIL) or a

downstream stage number.

VFRAC Destination of vapor steam entering the stage

(VFRAC1) and leaving the stage (VFRAC2) to be
sent to the destination. The value of vapor steam
entering and leaving the stage (VFRAC1 + VFRAC2)
must be between 0 and 1.

VDEST Destination (VDEST). Destination can be the gas

sales line (GAS), a downstream stage number, or
vented.

PVT Table This index defines which PVT table to use for the
separator calculation. It must be a valid PVT table
number.

Note: The parameter names that appear in the Surface Separator input
table are specific to the VIP software. However, these parameters are
also valid for the Nexus software. When you generate a Nexus data set,
the parameters are output to the Nexus data set as follows:

• LFRAC1 = FDL1
• LDEST1 = IDL1
• LDEST2 = IDL2
• VFRAC1 = FDV1
• VDEST1 = IDV1
• VDEST2 = IDV2

LFRAC2 and VFRAC2 do not have Nexus equivalents since they are
calculated automatically in Nexus from LFRAC1 and VFRAC1.

R5000.0.1 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables 143

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

144 Defining Table Data: Fluid Property Tables R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Defining Grid Array Data

Introduction

Grid array procedures and definitions are described in this chapter.

The Grid Arrays node allows you to define the reservoir properties to
be used in a simulation data set. For each reservoir property that you
define, a value must be assigned to each gridblock in the reservoir
model. The reservoir properties can vary spatially. The entire set of
values required to specify a particular reservoir property is called an
“array.”

To define a set of arrays, click the (+) button beside the Grid Arrays
node of the SimDataStudio™ options tree. Then double-click on the
icon beside the array type that you want to define. The related entry
pane opens. The Physical Properties Arrays panels is shown above.

R5000.0.1 Defining Grid Array Data: Introduction 145

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Array Panel

There is a standard user interface for entering most array definitions.

Standard definition procedures are described in this section. Individual
array definitions are described in the next section.

Use the Roadmap

As you define array data, the top of the panel dynamically updates as
shown below.

The top line shows you which arrays you have already defined. The
bottom line shows you which arrays are mandatory.

Note: Last Array Does Not Display on the Roadmap

Array data is not saved until you perform another action. The last array you
define is saved when you leave the panel. Therefore, it will not display on
the Roadmap unless you return to the panel.

Import Arrays
You can import array data from existing text (.cor) or binary (.bin) files
that have been created with other applications such as the
GRIDGENR™ software or the Z-MAP Plus™ software. When you
perform this type of import, the existing files are incorporated into the
SimDataStudio data set. Include statements that identify these files are
added to the initialization file that gets created when you generate a
Nexus® or VIP® data set.

You can also import array data from an existing .vdb folder.

146 Defining Grid Array Data: Array Panel R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Perform the following steps to import array data from existing files:

1. Specify the file type and select the file. Toggle ON the Is in
include file option or Is in vdb option to specify the file type.

Selection for text file

Selection for .vdb file

The File Selection dialog box opens. Navigate to the appropriate

directory and select the file to include. The file name displays in
the File Name field.

2. Load other properties (optional). If you want to load all other grid
arrays from the same file, click the Load Properties button. You
receive a confirmation prompt. Click the Yes button to close the
prompt window. All grid array data loads and populates the panels
under the Grid Data tree.

R5000.0.1 Defining Grid Array Data: Array Panel 147

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Define Arrays
Arrays can be defined as a constant, multiple of a property, or as a
variable. Procedures for each are described below.

Undoing an array definition

Note that you can “undo” an existing array definition at any time by clicking the
Not Used toggle.

Define Constant Array

Perform the following steps to define a constant array:

1. Select the option. Click to activate the Constant toggle as shown

below.
Constant value entry field
opens when activated

The constant value entry field opens.

2. Enter the constant. Click in the entry field and enter the value.

Define Multiple
Perform the following steps to define a multiple:

1. Select the option. Click to activate the Multiple toggle as shown

below.
Multiple specification fields
Property open when activated
selection

The multiple value specification fields open. The pulldown menu

lists whatever properties have currently been defined.

2. Select the property. Click the down arrow beside the toggle and
select the property for which you want to specify the multiplier.

3. Enter the multiplier. Click in the Multiplier Value field and enter
the multiplier.

148 Defining Grid Array Data: Array Panel R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Define Variable
Perform the following steps to define a variable in the X, Y, Z direction
or for all grid values:

1. Select the option. Click to activate the Variable toggle as shown

below.
Variable specification fields
open when activated
Variable
direction
selection

The variable value specification fields open.

2. Select the variable direction. Click the down arrow beside the
toggle and select the property for which you want to specify the
multiplier.

If you selected the X or Y, or Z direction, a table opens to provide

the I, J, or K range. If you selected All Grid Values, the table
allows for K/J values at each I.

3. Enter the values. Click in the Multiplier Value field and enter the
multiplier.

R5000.0.1 Defining Grid Array Data: Array Panel 149

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Overview of Array Data

Definition Arrays

Input Format
Properties
Selection Options

Along horizontal plane arrays Length of gridblock in X or Y direction measured along

horizontal
Gross or net vertical thickness
Ratio of net vertical thickness to gross
Along bedding plane arrays Length of gridblock in X or Y direction measured along
bedding plane
Gross or net stratum thickness
Depth to top of gridblock
Corner-point grid arrays X or Y direction cornerpoint location
Depth to each cornerpoint
Cornerpoint gross vertical or stratum thickness
Corner-point data arrays Eight X/Y/Z cornerpoints for each gridblock
Ratio of net vertical thickness to gross

150 Defining Grid Array Data: Overview of Array Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Physical Properties

Input Format
Properties
Selection Options

Porosity and gridblock permeability arrays Porosity of each gridblock. If both net and gross thickness
are input, porosity should correspond to the net thickness.
Permeability controlling flow in the X, Y, And Z direction,
applied at the gridblock face or center.

For gridblock face permeability (the VIP software only):

For gridblock face permeability, the value input for block (i,
j, k) is the permeability at the block face between cells (i -1, j,
k) and (i, j, k). For KXF is zero.
Rock compressibility can be given a value for each
gridblock. Typically rock compressibility can be expressed
as a function of porosity.

R5000.0.1 Defining Grid Array Data: Overview of Array Data 151

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Input Format
Properties
Selection Options

Gridblock pore volume and transmissibility arrays Pore volume of each gridblock
For a rectangular grid:

The x-direction transmissibility of gridblock (i, j, k) is

defined at the boundary between blocks (i-1,j,k)
and (i, j, k) and controls flow between them. For i = 1,
TX is zero.

The y direction transmissibility of gridblock (i, j, k) is

defined at the boundary between blocks (i, j-1, k) and
(i, j, k) and controls flow between them. For j = 1, TY is
zero.

The z-direction transmissibility of gridblock (i, j, k) is

defined at the boundary between blocks (i, j, k-1) and
(i, j, k) and controls flow between them. For k = 1, TZ
is zero.

For a diagonal grid (using a nine-point finite difference

operator):

The left diagonal-direction transmissibility of gridblock

(i, j, k) is defined (at an imaginary boundary) between
blocks (i-1,j-1,k) and (i, j, k) and controls flow between
them. For i=1 and for j=1, TXYL is zero.

The right diagonal-direction transmissibility of

gridblock (i, j, k) is defined (at an imaginary boundary)
between blocks (i+1,j-1,k) and (i, j, k) and controls
flow between them. For i = NX and for j=1, TXYR is
zero.

Rock compressibility can be given a value for each

gridblock. Typically rock compressibility can be expressed
as a function of porosity.

152 Defining Grid Array Data: Overview of Array Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Other Arrays

Array Type Properties

Region IEQUIL - Integer values defining distinct ranges for equilibrium regions. Each region may
have different water-oil and gas-oil contacts. Each value in this array directly refers to an
equilibrium region defined specified in Initialization pane. Default sets the entire array to 1;
i.e., only one set of contacts input for equilibrium data.
IPVT - Integer values distinguishing areas with differing PVT properties. Each value in the this
array directly refers to a set of input PVT tables defined in the Fluid Properties pane.
IREGION - Integer values defining different regions for output purposes. Gridblocks with the
same integer value are grouped together and considered a single region for output of average
pressure, cumulative injected volumes, cumulative produced volumes, net influx, and current
fluids in place in the Region Summary.
IRELPM - Integer values that distinguish areas containing rock types which require unique
saturation-dependent tables for inter-gridblock flow. Each value in this array directly refers to a
set of relative permeability/capillary pressure tables defined in the Rock Properties pane.
User-specified Pressure of each gridblock at the beginning of the run (time = 0).
Initialization
Average water saturation of each gridblock at the beginning of the run (time = 0).
Average gas saturation of each gridblock at the beginning of the run (time = 0).
Saturation Table Relative permeability of oil phase at connate minimum water saturation.
Endpoint
Residual water saturation.
Water saturation at residual oil saturation.
Relative permeability of water phase at residual oil saturation.
Maximum water saturation
Connate gas saturation.
Residual gas saturation.
Gas saturation at residual oil saturation.
Transmissibility The X/Y/Z direction transmissibility multiplier for gridblock (i, j, k) is defined at the boundary
Multiplier between blocks (i-1,j,k) and (i, j, k) and controls flow between them. For i = 1, TMX is zero.
For j = 1, TMY is zero. For k = 1, TMZ is zero.
Thermala Reference rock-specific heat capacity (values at standard temperature). Actual values are
calculated from reference values using the equation CPR = CPR0 (1 + DCPRDT (T-TS)).
Reference thermal conductivity in the X, Y, or Z direction (applied to gridblock center). Values
correspond to liquid-filled pore volume. Actual values are calculated from reference values
using the equation KT = KT0 (1 x DKDSG x SG), where KT is thermal conductivity.
Transmissibility/ The X/Y/Z transmissibilities are to be modified.
Pore Volume
Modifications

a. Options available only if the Therm reservoir model is selected. Note that not all THERM options are now available
in the SimDataStudio software. You can edit the initialization file to define these options in keyword format.

R5000.0.1 Defining Grid Array Data: Overview of Array Data 153

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Advanced Reservoir Model Arrays

The following arrays activate when advanced reservoir model options
are defined.

Reservoir
Array Properties
Model

Thermal Thermal Reference rock heat capacity at standard temperature.

Reference thermal conductivity in X, Y, and Z directions.

Duala Matrix Gridblock definition arrays (as described “Definition Arrays” on

Fracture page 150).

a. These options activate under each existing array in the options tree. Click the plus (+) icon beside each
array to open the Dual suboptions.

154 Defining Grid Array Data: Overview of Array Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Functions for Array Definition

The function option can be used to calculate dependencies for arrays,

either in tabulated or or analytical form. You can:

• Represent some correlations between reservoir rock properties

(analytical function).

• Calculate average values of a rock property array using

information about its values in another reservoir location
(interpolation function).

• Calculate volume-averaged values of a rock property array using

known gridblock center values (volume averaged function).

If a function is defined, the values of the output arrays in the grid

blocks are calculated as an analytical function of input array values. If a
table is defined with known values of output arrays at given values of
input arrays, an interpolation procedure is applied to define the values
of the output arrays in reservoir grid blocks.

An advanced multidimensional spline interpolation technique is used

for the tabular function representation. The order of the spline and the
number of the points of the function table used for the interpolation are

R5000.0.1 Defining Grid Array Data: Functions for Array Definition 155
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

defined internally in order to minimize the interpolation error. By

default, the total number of function table entries you define is used for
the calculation of the values in different grid blocks. However, you can
control the number of the function table entries used for the
interpolation and the spline order. You can also limit functions by
region, gridblock range, value, or distance.

Each option is described in detail.

Function Management and Selection

The Function Management and Selection panel lets you add, delete,
rename, and select functions.

Delete selected function Move up function list

Add function Move down function list

Add or Delete a Function

Before you begin defining the new function, click the icon to add a
function name to the list. By default, functions are named in numerical
sequence

To delete an existing function, click and highlight the function in the

list. Then click the icon to delete the selected function.

Rename a Function
Double-click in the function name field to erase the existing name and
enter a new one.

156 Defining Grid Array Data: Functions for Array Definition R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Select a Function
Click on a function name in the list to select it. You can then define or
edit the selected function name.

Define the Function

You can define an analytical, interpolated, or volume-averaged
function. Procedures for each are described below.

Analytical
Analytical function options are:

• POLYN is the polynomial of the n-th order. The polynomial order

n can be not larger than nine. The value of the output array (y) in a
grid block is determined as y = ao xn + a1 xn-1+ . . . + an, where x is
the value of the first input array in the grid block;

• ABS is the absolute value y = |x|;

• EXP is the exponential function y = ex;

• EXP10 is the exponential function y = 10x;

• LOG is the natural logarithm y = ln|x|;

• LOG10 is the common logarithm y = log10|x|;

• SQRT is the square root ( y = x ); ;

• SIN is the sine of degrees y = sin(x);

• COS is the cosine of degrees y = cos(x);

• GE is the step function

x, ifx greater than or equal to a 0

y =
a 1 , otherwise;

R5000.0.1 Defining Grid Array Data: Functions for Array Definition 157
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

• LE is the step function

• ADD is the sum of the values of the two input arrays in a grid
block y = x1 + x2;

• SUBT is the difference of the values of the two input arrays in a

grid block y = x1 - x2.

• DIV is the ratio of the values of the two input arrays in a grid
block,

( x 1 ⁄ x 2 ) ,if x 2 is not equal tozero,

y =
x1

• MULT is the product of the values of the two input arrays in a grid
block y = x1 × x2

• MIN is the minimum of the values of the two input arrays in a grid
block y = min (x1,x2)

• MAX is the maximum of the values of the two input arrays in a

grid block y = max (x1,x2)

Inputs

In the ABS, EXP, EXP10, LOG, LOG10, SQRT, SIN, COS, GE, LE, POLYN
analytical functions, only the first input array is used. All other input arrays are
ignored. In the DIV, MULT, ADD, SUBT, MIN, MAX analytical functions, the
first two input arrays are used. All other input arrays are ignored. If the number of
the input arrays in the DIV, MULT, ADD, SUBT, MIN, MAX analytical
functions is equal to one, the second input array is assumed to be equal to the first
input array.

Perform the following steps to define an analytical function:

1. Select function type. Click the down arrow beside the

Analytical Function field and select the function type.

158 Defining Grid Array Data: Functions for Array Definition R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

2. Open array selection dialog boxes. Click the the button beside
the Input Arrays and Output Arrays fields to open the Input and
Output Region Selection dialog boxes.

Click to open dialog box

The selected dialog box opens. The arrays you have defined are
available for selection in the Input dialog box. All arrays are
available for selection in the Output dialog box.

Work Arrays

Note that work arrays are available for intermediate functions.

IREGION Arrays

Note that if you define IREGION as an input or output array, any extra
regions you have defined are not included in the calculation.

3. Select input and output arrays. Click the plus (+) symbol beside
the Array topic folder to open the associated selection list. (Or
click the minus (-) symbol to close it.) Then click the check boxes
to select the function input and output array(s) as shown below.

Click +/- to open/close topic folder

(Red asterisk (*) symbol indicates
folder contains selections)
Click check box to select/deselect
parameter

R5000.0.1 Defining Grid Array Data: Functions for Array Definition 159
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Error Checking

Note that your input/output array fields will tag inconsistencies between the
analytical function you selected and the arrays that you have specified. In the
example below, the MAX function (maximum of the values of two input arrays)
has been selected, but only one input array has been specified. The (?) in the input
array field shows that an array is missing.

(?) another input array needed

If coefficients are needed for the selected function, the panel

expands to display the coefficients field as shown below.

4. Specify coefficients if necessary. Click the the button beside the

Coefficients field. The Analytical Function Coefficients dialog
box opens as shown below.

Click in the Values field and enter a value for each required
coefficient. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Interpolation
Perform the following steps to define an interpolation function.

1. Select the function. Click to activate the Interpolation toggle. The

Input-Output Values table opens.

160 Defining Grid Array Data: Functions for Array Definition R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

2. Open array selection dialog boxes. Click the the button beside
the Input Arrays and Output Arrays fields to open the Input and
Output Region Selection dialog boxes.

Click to open dialog box

The selected dialog box opens. The arrays you have defined are
available for selection in the Input dialog box. All arrays are
available for selection in the Output dialog box.

Work Arrays

Note that work arrays are available for intermediate functions.

IREGION Arrays

Note that if you define IREGION as an input or output array, any extra
regions you have defined are not included in the calculation.

3. Select input and output arrays. Click the plus (+) symbol beside
the Array topic folder to open the associated selection list. (Or
click the minus (-) symbol to close it.) Then click the check boxes
to select the function input and output array(s) as shown below

Click +/- to open/close topic folder

(Red asterisk (*) symbol indicates
folder contains selections)
Click check box to select/deselect
parameter

R5000.0.1 Defining Grid Array Data: Functions for Array Definition 161
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

4. Complete the table. Enter the corresponding input array to output

array values as shown below.

In the example above, permeability is defined as a function of

porosity and critical water saturation.

5. Specify number of table entries for spline interpolation. Click to

activate the Specify Number of Table Entries to Use for
Interpolation toggle. Click the up or down stepper arrow
located next to the toggle to increase or decrease the number of
tables entries to use. The default is to calculate through all points
in the table.

Volume Averaged (Cartesian Grids Only)

Perform the following steps to define a volume-average function.

1. Select the function. Click to activate the Volume Averaged toggle.

The Input-Output Values table opens. Input values are
automatically defined as XC (grid centerpoint in X direction), YC
(grid centerpoint in Y direction), and MDEPTH (depth to center of
gridblock).

2. Complete the table. Enter the XC, YC, MDEPTH and

corresponding output array value(s) as shown below.

3. Specify number of table entries for spline interpolation. Click to

activate the Specify Number of Table Entries to Use for

162 Defining Grid Array Data: Functions for Array Definition R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Interpolation toggle. Click the up or down stepper arrow

located next to the toggle to increase or decrease the number of
tables entries to use. The default is to calculate through all points
in the table.

Define Range
You can limit the function to a specific region or gridblock range, value
range, or distance as described below.

Gridblock Range
The default is to apply the function to all gridblocks in all regions.
Click the Select Gridblock Range toggle to activate the gridblock
range options as shown below.

Limit by Region Type

Click the Specify Region Type toggle to limit the function by region
type. The Region Type fields open as shown below.

Region Type drop-down menu Open Region Selection dialog box

Perform the following steps to limit the function to a particular region:

1. Select the region type. Click the down arrow next to the Specify
Region Type field and select the type from the list of regions you
defined within the Region Arrays panel.

R5000.0.1 Defining Grid Array Data: Functions for Array Definition 163
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

2. Select the regions. Click the button next to the Selected

Regions field. The Region Selection dialog box opens as shown
below.

Click Check Box to select region

There is a checkbox in the Selection Indicator field beside each

region. Click the checkbox beside the regions to activate and click
the OK button to close the dialog box.

Limit by Gridblocks
Click the Specify Gridblock Range toggle to limit the function by I, J,
K range. The Gridblock Range fields open as shown below.

Click the up or down stepper arrow beside the From/To fields in each
direction to define the range over which the function is applied.In the
above example, the function will be applied in gridblocks 1 through 10
in all directions.

Value Range
You can limit the output array to within specific bounds for input value
read and/or output value calculated. You can also limit by the distance
between the gridblock and the input point used for the calculation.

Note

You may need to scroll down to locate these options.

164 Defining Grid Array Data: Functions for Array Definition R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Limit by Value
Perform the following steps to limit the output array by defining a
minimum and maximum value.All interpolated values not within the
bounds you define are set to the minimum or maximum value. If these
bounds are not defined, the default is (+/-)1.e+12.

1. Open the dialog box. Click the button located next to the Input
Range, or Output Range field. The Bounds dialog box opens as
shown below. The Bounds for Input Arrays dialog box lists all the
function input arrays you have defined. The Bounds for Output
Array dialog box lists all the function output arrays you have
defined.

2. Enter the bounds. Click in the entry field and enter the value. Click
OK to close the dialog box. The value(s) you entered display in
the entry field.

Limit by Distance
This option lets you define the range of points to use for the polynomial
fit for each property. The larger the number (in property units), the
more range of influence each point will have over distant points along
the curve. The default is 1E+12 (use all points).

1. Open the dialog box. Click the button located next to the Input
DRange field. The Input Points Maximum Distance dialog box

R5000.0.1 Defining Grid Array Data: Functions for Array Definition 165
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

opens as shown below. The dialog box lists all the function input
arrays you have defined.

2. Enter the range for each input array. Click in the entry field and
enter the maximum range value (in property units). Click OK to
close the dialog box. The value(s) you entered display in the entry
field.

166 Defining Grid Array Data: Functions for Array Definition R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Grid Coarsening

This option lets you coarsen the refined grid in the I, J, K and X, Y, Z
direction.

Perform the following steps to coarsen the grid.

1. Activate Coarsening method. The default is to coarsen the entire

grid. Use the Coarsening Method options to activate the toggle to
specify that cells across faults or with varying integer values
should not be coarsened. Or you can specify not to connect non-
standard connection layers when coarsening across faults.

2. Coarsen the grid. Specify grid sections and coarsening factor in

the I, J, K and X,Y,Z directions. Specify the gridblock range to
coarsen and the corresponding number of coarse blocks to create
within the range.

3. Define grid block decomposition (Optional): This section allows

you to override the automatic coarsening resulting from the
previous step by specifying how the fine blocks are to be
combined in the coarsened grid. Any combination of X, Y, or Z
data may be entered. Any direction not having data entered will
use the results of the automatic coarsening from the previous step.

R5000.0.1 Defining Grid Array Data: Grid Coarsening 167

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

4. Block decomposition (fine grid blocks). Click in the Fine Block

Decomposition in the Z Direction field and enter a grid block
decomposition value. The number of values entered must equal the
number of coarse blocks requested in the specified direction and
the values must sum to the fine block range which is being
decomposed.

Example: if your coarsen values are:

1 10 1 20 1 5 5 10 5

by default each coarsened cell would be 2x2x1 of the fine cell.

But, if the Fine Grid Decomposition values are entered for the
same coarsening values as follows, a different coarsening scheme
would result in which the cells at the outer edges of the grid would
be coarsened but the cells on the inner edge would not.

X 3 1 1 1 3 (X)
Y 4 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 (Y)
Z 1 1 1 1 1 (Z)

168 Defining Grid Array Data: Grid Coarsening R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Well Management Level Data

Introduction

The Well Management Level Data panel lets you view, define, and edit
the available fields, areas, flow stations and gathering centers involved
in a simulation.

R5000.0.1 Well Management Level Data: Introduction 169

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Click the plus (+) minus (-) to increase or decrease the displayed level
in the Hierarchy column. Then right-click on a symbol to open a menu
corresponding to the selected level. Or right-click in a corresponding
field to open the menu.

For the selected date/time, these menus let you add, delete, and rename
new components and assign targets and rates.

Add, Delete, or Rename Components

Selecting the Add option on any shortcut menu automatically adds a

new component to the diagram. You can then rename or delete that
component, or add sub-components to it.

When you select the Add option on a Gathering Center, the Well List
opens as shown below.

CTRL-click to select multiple wells. Shift-click to select a series. Or

activate the Well Filter option to enter a search string.

170 Well Management Level Data: Add, Delete, or Rename Components R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Right-click on the component to Delete or Rename and select the

option from the menu. The component is removed, or the name is
removed and your cursor is placed in the entry field to enter a new
name.

Assign Targets and Rates

Define the following values from the menu options. Once defined, the
values display in the Well Management Level table.

Target and Rate Descriptions

These options are described in detail in the Well Data chapter of the Nexus®
Keyword Document. Keywords are provided below for cross-reference.

• Production rate (PTARG). The following dialog box opens. Click

the toggle(s) to activate the phase and enter the corresponding
target.

If you activate the gas phase, you can choose to include gaslift gas.

• Injection rate (ITARG). The following dialog box opens. Click the
toggle(s) to activate the phase and enter the corresponding target.

R5000.0.1 Well Management Level Data: Add, Delete, or Rename Components 171
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

• Minimum production rate (PRDMIN). The following dialog box

opens. Click the toggle(s) to activate the phase and enter the
corresponding rate.

For each phase, you can select to shut in producer wells when the
corresponding rate is not met.

• Minimum injection rate (INJMIN). The following dialog box

opens. Click the toggle(s) to activate the phase and enter the
corresponding rate.

For each phase, you can select to shut in injectors when the
corresponding rate is not met.

• Ontime factor (ONTIME). The following dialog box opens. Click

the toggle(s) to activate the phase and enter the corresponding
factor.

Wellbore constants for the perforations, and rate constraints are

scaled by the well ontime factor. Hydraulic pressure drop is
evaluated at the “full-on” rate, i.e., reported rate/ontime. The
ontime factor provides an approximate method of increasing
timestep sizes by avoiding explicitly shutting in wells during
expected or observed periods of downtime.

172 Well Management Level Data: Add, Delete, or Rename Components R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

You can specify a single factor or a separate factor for producing

and injecting wells.

Rate constraints and wellbore constants for the perforations are

scaled by the well ontime factor. Hydraulic pressure drop is
evaluated at the “full-on” rate (i.e., reported rate/ontime). The
ontime factor provides an approximate method of increasing
timestep sizes by avoiding explicitly shutting in wells during
expected or observed periods of downtime.

R5000.0.1 Well Management Level Data: Add, Delete, or Rename Components 173
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Global Gaslift Options and Optimization Tables

The Nexus software allows you to define global gaslift defaults and
import gaslift optimization tables.

Gaslift Global Options

Global options will be applied to all wells in the network for which
individual values are not defined. Perform the following steps to set the
global values.

1. Select active date. Click the active data in the Date/Time Card
Selection list at the right of the panel.

2. Define control values. Enter the gaslift Control options as

described below:

Parameter Description

Time Interval for Gaslift Maximum time interval between optimization

Rate Calculation calculations. (Days, Days, Days, Hours).
Default is 90 Days.

174 Well Management Level Data: Global Gaslift Options and Optimization Tables R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Parameter Description

Minimum Gaslift Effi- Minimum gas lift efficiency (i.e., oil

ciency production rate / gas lift rate) below which the
connection will be taken off gas lift. This limit
should be specified for the gas lift connection.
The Oil Production Rate will be the rate in the
out flowing connection from the specified
output node for the gas lift connection (often
the tubing connection). (STB/MSCF, m3/ m3,
m3/ m3, cc/cc) The default is no minimum.
Include Gaslift Gas in Not applicable to the Nexus software.
Gas Handling Loop

3. Define optimization values. Click the ellipse button beside the

Gas Lift Optimization parameters to open the dialog box. Enter the
following optimization and calculation data:

Parameter Description

Value of Produced Oil Enter the value of produced oil. ($/STB, $/

m3, $/m3,$/cc). Default is30 $/Stb.
Value of Produced Gas Enter the the value of produced gas. ($/MSCF,
$/m3, $/m3,$/cc). Default is 3 $/MSCF
Cost of Gaslift Injected Enter the cost of gas lift gas injected. ($/
MSCF, $/m3, $/m3,$/cc). Default is 4.5 $/
MSCF
Cost of Produced Water Enter the cost of produced water. ($/STB, $/
m3, $/m3,$/cc). Default is 2 $/Stb
Maximum Time Interval Enter the maximum time interval between
between Optimization optimization calculations. (Days, Days, Days,
Calculations Hours). Default: 90 Days
Minimum Time Interval Enter the minimum time interval between
between Optimization optimization calculations. (Days, Days, Days,
Calculations Hours). Default is 0 Days

R5000.0.1 Well Management Level Data: Global Gaslift Options and Optimization Tables 175
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Ontime Treatment for Gas Lift

This option allows you to control whether ontime factors are applied to
gaslift. The ontime factor option is an approximate method of
increasing timestep sizes by avoiding explicitly shutting in wells during
expected or observed periods of downtime.

The Do not apply ontime to gaslift connections option disables the

use of ontime factors. Toggle the option ON to disable ontime
treatment for gaslift.

176 Well Management Level Data: Global Gaslift Options and Optimization Tables R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Optimal GLR Tables

Scroll to the bottom of the panel and click the Import from File
button. The File Selection dialog box opens.

Select the table to import or click the toggle to import all tables. The
preview box for the table opens for the table highlighted in the list.

Click the Open button to close the Selection dialog box and import the
table(s).

R5000.0.1 Well Management Level Data: Global Gaslift Options and Optimization Tables 177
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Injection Regions

This panel is not valid for the Nexus software. Injection Regions should
only be used for converting VIP® models with existing Injection
Region data. Any new voidage replacement or pressure maintenance
data should be input through the Targeting Options panel (see
“Targeting Options” on page 180).

178 Well Management Level Data: Injection Regions R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Gas Cycling

This panel is not valid for SimDataStudio™. Gas Cycling data can be
entered using Nexus keywords.

R5000.0.1 Well Management Level Data: Gas Cycling 179

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Targeting Options

Target parameters let you satisfy production or injection constraints by

controlling multiple connections simultaneously (as opposed to
CONSTRAINT input which constrains the production and injection in
a single connection). The production or injection target (i.e. the total
rate to be produced or injected) can be specified, or calculated by
various methods, and the method by which the target rate is allocated to
the controlled connections can be specified. When control methods are
based on potential production and injection, this potential is defined as
the rate that would be obtained if all targets in the system were relaxed,
constrained by all defined constraints.

The Target Controls window is shown below.

Target Controls option Panel tabs

Additional tabs let you access more panels in order to:

• Define the targets. Import or define targets and establish constraint

parameters. (Refer to “Target Management” on page 181.)

180 Well Management Level Data: Targeting Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

• Maintain the connection lists. Create and manage the members of

connection lists. (Refer to “Connections List Management” on
page 187.)

• View target plots. View pre-define target-related plots. (Refer to

“Target Value Plot” on page 189.)

Target Management
You can either define or import an existing target management file.
Perform the following steps to specify the target management
parameters.

Import a File
Scroll to the bottom of the panel and click the Import from File button
to access a file selection dialog box in order to import an existing file.
When you select a path/filename for a file in the appropriate format and
click the OK button, the panel is populated with the existing target
management data

Define a Target
Perform the following steps to define target management parameters.

1. Add a target. Scroll to the bottom of the panel and click the Add
New Target button. A menu displays letting you select the target
type: simple production/injection, voidage replacement, or
pressure maintenance. You can also select to activate a Wizard to
define a simple target by specifying the phase rate, production/
injection value allocation method.

2. Select the target date. Click on a date in the Date/Time card

column on the right of the panel. The selected date displays in the
Active From field.

3. Specify the target parameters. Click in the remaining columns to

select or enter the target parameters as defined in the table below.
For more information, note that exact keyword names as described
in the “Production and Injection Targets” section of the “Surface
Network” chapter of the Nexus Keyword Document are shown in
capital letters.

R5000.0.1 Well Management Level Data: Targeting Options 181

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Parameter Description

CTRL Click in the field and select from the pull-

down menu to specify the type of flow rate
control to be imposed at each of the control
connections based on conditions specified in
the next (CTRLCOND) column:
QO – oil rate.
QW – water rate.
QG – gas rate.
QLIQ – liquid rate.
QHC – hydrocarbon rate.
QALL – total fluid rate.
DEACTIVATE – deactivate target.
CTRLCOND Click in the field and select from the pull-
down menu to specify the conditions used for
the control (default is Surface):

SURFACE -- surface conditions.

FIELD -- field average reservoir conditions

(Not valid for the master network file in a mul-
tifield run).

REGAVG -- average reservoir conditions for

the region. (Note: this assumes the same
region that is used to calculate the target rate.)

CON at the conditions of the connections in

the CTRLCONS connection list.
CTRLCONS Click in the field and select from the pull-
down menu to specify the connection list to be
controlled to satisfy the target:

All Production Well Connections

All Production Wellhead Connections
All Injection Well Connections
All Injection Wellhead Connections

The connection list should not mix connec-

tions controlling injection with connections
controlling production.

182 Well Management Level Data: Targeting Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Parameter Description

CTRLMETHOD Click in the field and select from the pull-

down menu to specify the method to be used to
allocate the target constraint to the controlling
connections (default is SCALE):

SCALE -- scale back connection rates in pro-

portion to their productivity/injectivity (lim-
ited by any maximum rate constraints
specified for the connection).

AVG -- average all connections which are not

limited by a pressure constraint or a maximum
rate constraint flow at the same average rate.

GUIDERATE -- all connections which are not

limited by a pressure constraint or a maximum
rate constraint are scaled back in proportion to
their specified guide rate.

WCUT -- reduce the production rate of the

highest water cut wells to the user-specified
minimum rate until the target is reached. The
last well reduced is constrained so that the tar-
get is exactly met.

GOR -- reduce the production rate of the high-

est GOR wells to the user-specified minimum
rate until the target is reached. The last well
reduced is constrained so that the target is
exactly met.

WRATE -- reduce the production rate of the

highest water rate wells to the user-specified
minimum rate until the target is reached. The
last well reduced is constrained so that the tar-
get is exactly met.

GRATE -- reduce the production rate of the

highest gas rate wells to the user-specified
minimum rate until the target is reached. The
last well reduced is constrained so that the tar-
get is exactly met.

R5000.0.1 Well Management Level Data: Targeting Options 183

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Parameter Description

AVGGOR -- reset the rates of the highest GOR

wells to an average rate. The number of wells
with reduced rates is the minimum required to
meet the target.

AVGWCUT -- reset the rates of the highest

water cut wells to an average rate. The number
of wells with reduced rates is the minimum
required to meet the target.

184 Well Management Level Data: Targeting Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Parameter Description

CALCMETHOD Click in the field and select from the pull-

down menu to specify how the target rate will
be determined. The default is to use the rate
specified in the VALUE column, but can also
be specified as the sum of the flow rates:

QW - total water rate.

QG - total gas rate.
QO - total oil rate.
QLIQ - total liquid rate.
QHC - total hydrocarbon rate.
QALL - total rate.
QWP - total potential water rate.
QGP - total potential gas rate.
QOP - total potential oil rate.
QLIQP - total potential liquid rate.
QHCP - total potential hydrocarbon rate.
QALLP - total potential rate.
QWNETPROD - net water production rate.
QGNETPROD - net gas production rate.
QONETPROD - net oil production rate.
QLIQNETPROD - net liquid production rate.
QHCNETPROD - net hydrocarbon production
rate.
QALLNETPROD - net total production rate.
QWPNETPROD - net potential water produc-
tion rate.
QGPNETPROD - net potential gas production
rate.
QOPNETPROD - net potential oil production
rate.
QLIQPNETPROD - net potential liquid pro-
duction rate.
QHCPNETPROD - net potential hydrocarbon
production rate.
QALLPNETPROD - net potential total pro-
duction rate.
QWNETINJ - net water injection rate.
QGNETINJ - net gas injection rate.
QONETINJ - net oil injection rate.
QLIQNETINJ - net liquid injection rate.
QHCNETINJ - net hydrocarbon injection rate.
QALLNETINJ - net total injection rate.

R5000.0.1 Well Management Level Data: Targeting Options 185

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Parameter Description
QWPNETINJ - net potential water injection
rate.
QGPNETINJ - net potential gas injection rate.
QOPNETINJ - net potential oil injection rate.
QLIQPNETINJ - net potential liquid injection
rate.
QHCPNETINJ - net potential hydrocarbon
injection rate.
QALLPNETINJ - net potential total injection
rate.
CALCCOND Click in the field and select from the pull-
down menu to specify the conditions used to
calculate the target rate (default is Surface):

SURFACE -- surface conditions.

FIELD -- field average reservoir conditions

(Not valid for the master network file in a mul-
tifield run).

REGAVG -- average reservoir conditions for

the region.

CON -- at the conditions of the connections in

the connection list.
CALCCONS Click in the field and select from the pull-
down menu to specify which connection list
contributes to the target calculation.
VALUE Click in the entry field and enter the value for
the target rate.
ADDVALUE Click in the entry field and enter the value for
the amount which will be added to the
target rate calculated by CALCMETHOD.
(Can not be used with INJTGTP and PRODT-
GTP methods).
REGION If the specified calculation method requires a
region or if REGAVG is specified for CTRL-
COND or CALCCOND, click in the field and
select from the pull-down menu of previously-
defined regions.

186 Well Management Level Data: Targeting Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Parameter Description

PRIORITY Click the up or down steppers to specify the

priority for the target. Priority is in inverse
order of its integer value, i.e. a value of 1 is the
highest priority. Targets are satisfied in the
order of their priority.
QMIN Click in the entry field and enter the minimum
rate for each connection. This minimum rate
will be used by every connection.
QGUIDE Click in the field and select from the pull-
down menu the rate for every connection as
defined under the “Guide Rate Management”
on page 189 tab. Or select FORMULA to
specify that the guide rate formula (see the
“Guide Rate Formula” section of the “Surface
Network” chapter of the Nexus Keyword Doc-
ument) will be used to calculate the guide rate.
MAXDPDT Click in the entry field and enter the maximum
rate of change of region pressure versus time if
the INJTGTP or PRODTGTP method of calcu-
lating a target is specified.
RANKDT Click in the entry field and specify the mini-
mum time change between re-ranking the con-
nections if the CTRLMETHOD is WCUT,
GOR, WRATE, GRATE, AVGWCUT or
AVGGOR is used. Ranking will not be re-per-
formed until the time elapsed from the last
ranking exceeds this time limit.

Connections List Management

You can use this panel to define and manage your target connection
lists. Perform the following steps to create a new connections list.

1. Add a line. Click the Add Line button located at the bottom, right
of the panel as shown below. (Notice the use of the other list

R5000.0.1 Well Management Level Data: Targeting Options 187

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

management buttons in the illustration.)

As you define the function, the description will display on the line
you added.

2. Select an effective date. Click on a date in the Date/Time Card

column at the right of the panel to select an effective date for the
connection list.

3. Select the members at effective date. Click the ellipse button

next to the Add at Date column. This opens the Add to
Connection List dialog box within which you can create a new
connection list or add to an existing one.

tabs for connection types

Click the tab for each corresponding connection type to define. For
each type, all connections of the type display as shown below.

selected connection

188 Well Management Level Data: Targeting Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

4. Select the connections. Click the corresponding box to select the

connection as shown in the illustration above. Once you have
selected all the connections under each tab and clicked the OK
button to close the dialog box, your selections are listed in the
Members at Date column.

Use the same procedure to remove connections at a selected date.

Deselected connections are listed in the Remove at Date column.

Guide Rate Management

Click in the field and select from the pull-down menu the rate for every
connection as defined under the “Guide Rate Management” on
page 189 tab. Or select FORMULA to specify that the guide rate
formula (see the “Guide Rate Formula” section of the “Surface
Network” chapter of the Nexus Keyword Document) will be used to
calculate the guide rate.

Target Value Plot

This panel lets you display various pre-defined target-related plots,
including:

• Comparative rate value of each target

• Total rate or rate potential by connection list

• Pressure maintenance or voidage replacement for a region

• Connection list or region net production or injection.

Click the pull-down menu next to the Target Type field as shown
below to select from a complete list of plot options.

R5000.0.1 Well Management Level Data: Targeting Options 189

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Procedure Definition

Procedures are a set of instructions which direct the Nexus software to

perform user- specified actions if user-defined conditions have been
satisfied. A FORTRAN-like syntax is used. Procedures are input as part
of the surface network file.

Procedure definition allows a great deal of flexibility in specifying

constraints and actions. Common variables are predefined for
convenience in setting up the procedure statements.

This SimDataStudio Panel is not yet functional. Procedure definitions

must be defined precisely as described in the “Procedures” chapter of
the Nexus Keyword Document and input as part of the surface network
file.

190 Well Management Level Data: Procedure Definition R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Drill Queue

This panel is not yet valid in the SimDataStudio software. The drill
queue options are fully functional through Nexus keywords.

R5000.0.1 Well Management Level Data: Drill Queue 191

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

192 Well Management Level Data: Drill Queue R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Multipliers - Overrides

Introduction

Data Management and Selection

Data Management and Selection options lets you add and delete from
the list array definitions that can be defined by array name and I,J, K
grid range.

Delete selected function Move down function list

Add function Move up function list

Add an Array Name and Range

Click the icon to add a new line to the list.

Delete Array Name and Range

Click and highlight the line in the list. Then click the icon to delete
the selected line.

Move between Lines

Click and highlight a line in the list. Then click the and icons to
move within the defined list.

R5000.0.1 Multipliers - Overrides: Introduction 193

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Connections Transmissibility Modification

This panel lets you modify the transmissibilities across arbitrary

connections between gridblocks. No new fault connections may be
established. The data must specify a generated fault connection or a
standard connection.

Data is imported or entered in VIP® format using in the same manner

as the VIP MULT option. If a standard connection is specified, a
regular transmissibility array defined using the OVER/VOVER options
will be changed.

Procedures for modifying connection transmissibilities are described.

Procedures
Perform the following steps to to complete the Array Modification
panel.

194 Multipliers - Overrides: Connections Transmissibility Modification R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

1. Define array. Click in the Array field and select the array name
from the pull down menu. Available arrays are connection
transmissibilities in the X, Y, and Z direction.

2. Define the gridblock range. Click in the To/From fields to define

the I, J, K gridblock range to limit the modifications by I, J, K
range. Click the up or down stepper arrow to define the range over
which the modification is applied.

3. Define the action. Click and select the modification action from
the pull-down menu: add, subtract, multiply, or divide.

4. Define the value. Click in the entry field and enter the value
associated with the action (i.e., an action of multiply with a value
of 2 will multiply all the values within the defined range by 2).

5. Define the format for the value. These options are defined as follows:

• The Single Value option lets you enter a single modifier in the
Value field. This modifier is applied to the grid cell range by
the specified operator.

• The All Values option opens a dialog box in the Value field
and lets you enter modifiers for each grid cell in the range. These
modifiers are applied by the specified operator.

• The Include File option is the same as the Single Value

option, except that you can import the modifier from an
include file.

• The All Values in Include File option is the same as the All
Values option, except that you can import the modifiers from
an include file.

• The All Values in vdb option is the same as the All Values
option, except that you can import the modifiers from a vdb.

Include files

The include file data can provide OVER/VOVER values (for standard,
unfaulted grids) or MULT values (for faulted grids) but a single include file
cannot mix the two types of keyword values.

R5000.0.1 Multipliers - Overrides: Connections Transmissibility Modification 195

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

6. Select the connection type. Click in the Connect Type field and
specify whether you want the multiplier applied only to standard
connections, only to non-standard connections, or all connections
within the region.

7. Define the transmissibility direction. Click in the Trans. Direction

field and select PLUS or MINUS from the pull-down menu. This
is the direction (from block center) for which transmissibility
multipliers for the faces are to be modified.

8. Define the named fault. Click in the Fault Name field and select
from a list of named faults (FNAME). This is the fault to which
modifiers will be applied.

9. Enter a description (option). Click in the Description entry field

and enter an optional description for the multiplier.

196 Multipliers - Overrides: Connections Transmissibility Modification R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Transmissibility/Pore Volume Modifications

This panels lets you modify the transmissibility/pore volume arrays at

initialization. Only normal interblock transmissibilities will be
modified.

Data is imported or entered in VIP format using in the same manner as the
VIP OVER/VOVER options.

OVER/VOLVER and MULT Options

When using the corner point option with automatically generated fault
connections, transmissibility overreads can be specified using the MULT option.
As well as modifying the interblock transmissibilities, the MULT option also
modifies the transmissibilities across faults between blocks with modified
transmissibilities, whereas the OVER/VOVER cards will only modify normal
interblock connection transmissibilities. Care should be taken not to specify, for
example, both OVER TX cards and MULT cards with overlapping ranges as this
will result in normal interblock transmissibilities being modified twice.

Procedures for defining transmissibility and pore volume modifications

are described.

R5000.0.1 Multipliers - Overrides: Transmissibility/Pore Volume Modifications 197

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Procedures
Perform the following steps to define transmissibility or pore volume
modifications.

1. Define array. Click in the Array field and select the array name
from the pull down menu. Available arrays are pore volume (PV)
and transmissibilities in the X, Y, and Z direction.

2. Define the gridblock range. Click in the To/From fields to limit

the function by I, J, K range. Click the up or down stepper arrow to
define the range over which the function is applied.

3. Define the action. Click and select the modification action from
the pull-down menu: add, subtract, multiply, or divide.

4. Define the value. Click in the entry field and enter the value
associated with the action (i.e., an action of multiply with a value
of 2 will multiply all the values within the defined range by 2).

5. Define the format for the value. These options are defined as follows:

• The Single Value option lets you enter a single modifier in the
Value field. This modifier is applied to the grid cell range by
the specified operator.

• The All Values option opens a dialog box in the Value field
and lets you enter modifiers for each grid cell in the range. These
modifiers are applied by the specified operator.

• The Include File option is the same as the Single Value

option, except that you can import the modifier from an
include file.

• The All Values in Include File option is the same as the All
Values option, except that you can import the modifiers from
an include file.

Include files

The include file data can provide OVER/VOVER values (for standard,
unfaulted grids) or MULT values (for faulted grids) but a single include file
cannot mix the two types of keyword values.

198 Multipliers - Overrides: Transmissibility/Pore Volume Modifications R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

6. Define the named fault. Click in the Fault Name field and select
from a list of named faults (FNAME). This is the fault to which
modifiers will be applied.

7. Enter a description (option). Click in the Description entry field

and enter an optional description for the multiplier.

R5000.0.1 Multipliers - Overrides: Transmissibility/Pore Volume Modifications 199

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Half-Transmissibilities

This panel lets you specify half-transmissibilities as the calculation

method. Half -transmissibility calculation can be used when these
values are stored in the VDB from the the PowerGrid™ software or
GRIDGENR™ upscaler.

Half-transmissibilities from the upscaler better model the data

variations in the original geological model. While transmissibility
calculations use permeability data that is upscaled for the entire cell,
half transmissibility calculations better follow the weighting of data
within a specific direction (X+, X-, Y+, etc).

Data is imported or entered in VIP format using in the same manner as

the VIP TOVER option.

Procedures for defining half-transmissibilities are described below.

200 Multipliers - Overrides: Half-Transmissibilities R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Procedures
Perform the following steps to define half-transmissibilities.

1. Define array. Click in the Array field and select the array name
from the pull down menu. Available arrays are transmissibilities in
the X, Y, and Z direction.

2. Define the gridblock range. Click in the To/From fields to limit

the function by I, J, K range. Click the up or down stepper arrow to
define the range over which the function is applied.

3. Define the action. Click and select the modification action from
the pull-down menu: add, subtract, multiply, or divide.

4. Define the value. Click in the entry field and enter the value
associated with the action (i.e., an action of multiply with a value
of 2 will multiply all the values within the defined range by 2).

5. Define the format for the value. These options are defined as follows:

• The All Values option opens a dialog box in the Value field
and lets you enter modifiers for each grid cell in the range.
These modifiers are applied by the specified operator.

• The All Values in Include File option is the same as the All
Values option, except that you can import the modifiers from
an include file.

• The All Values in vdb option applies the half transmissibility

settings to all instances of the selected array in the current .vdb
file.

• The Include File option allows you to import the modifiers

from an include file.

6. Enter a description (option). Click in the Description entry field

and enter an optional description for the multiplier.

R5000.0.1 Multipliers - Overrides: Half-Transmissibilities 201

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Arbitrary Gridblock Connections

When using the standard fault option this panel lets you specify non-
cornerpoint connections between gridblocks and the transmissibility
between two blocks connected as the result of a named fault

Data is imported or entered in VIP format using in the same manner as the
VIP FLT option.

Procedures for defining arbitrary gridblock connections are described.

Procedures
Perform the following steps to define arbitrary gridblock connections.

1. Define the gridblock range. Click in the To/From fields to limit

the function by I, J, K range. Click the up or down stepper arrow to
define the range over which the function is applied.

2. Select the grid. Click the Grid field and select the active grid for
which the connections are to be made.

202 Multipliers - Overrides: Arbitrary Gridblock Connections R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

3. Define the value. If Single Value format is selected, click in the

entry field and enter the value. If the Include File value format is
selected, a File Selection dialog box opens when you click in the
Value field.

4. Define the format for the value. The Single Value option applies a
constant arithmetic operation to the specified portion of the grid
system. It modifies the immediately preceding array data.

When the Include File value format is selected, a File Selection

dialog box opens when you click in the Value field.

5. Define the named fault. Click in the Fault Name field and select
from a list of named faults (FNAME). This is the fault to which
modifiers will be applied.

6. Enter a description (option). Click in the Description entry field

and enter an optional description for the multiplier.

R5000.0.1 Multipliers - Overrides: Arbitrary Gridblock Connections 203

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Inter/Intra Gridblock Region Transmissibility

Multipliers

This panel displays the named transmissibility regions and lets you
assign a multiplier to modify transmissibilities between and within
gridblocks over time. Both standard and non-standard connections can
be multiplied.

Data is imported or entered in VIP format using in the same manner as

the VIP MULTIR and corresponding PTHLD options. Flow across any
interface connection will not occur until the phase potential difference
across the connection exceeds the threshold pressure. The phase
potential difference to flow will be reduced by the threshold pressure.

Procedures for modifying transmissibility multipliers are described.

204 Multipliers - Overrides: Inter/Intra Gridblock Region Transmissibility Multipliers R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Procedures
Perform the following steps to define inter/intra gridblock region
transmissibility multipliers.

1. Select the transmissibility region from which the multiplier is to be

applied . Click on the transmissibility region from which you want
to assign the multiplier. The line highlights.

2. Select the transmissibility region to which the multiplier is to be

applied . If it is not displayed by default, click in the entry field
and enter the region to which you want to assign the multiplier.

3. Enter the multiplier. Click in the Multiplier entry field and enter
the multiplier value.

4. Select the direction. Click in the Direction field and select the
multiplier direction from the pull-down menu: X, Y, Z, or both X
and Y.

5. Select the connection type. Click in the Connect Type field and
specify whether you want the multiplier applied only to standard
connections, only to non-standard connections, or all connections
within the region.

6. Enter a description (option). Click in the Description entry field

and enter an optional description for the multiplier.

R5000.0.1 Multipliers - Overrides: Inter/Intra Gridblock Region Transmissibility Multipliers 205

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Named Fault Multipliers

This panel displays named faults that intersect the grid and lets you
assign fault multipliers to change the transmissibility of the fault over
time.

Data is imported or entered in VIP format using in the same manner as

the VIP MULTFL option.

Multiplier values range from zero to one:

Value Description
0 sealed
1 fully conductive
decimal value between 0 and 1 partial transmissibility value

206 Multipliers - Overrides: Named Fault Multipliers R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Procedures for entering fault transmissibilities are described below.

Alternate Method for Assigning Pressure Dependent Faults

Optionally, the PTHLD keyword lets you assign gridblock to gridblock flow
based on calculated pressure threshold. Refer to the “Inter/Intra Gridblock
Region Transmissibility Multipliers” on page 204.

Procedures
Perform the following steps to assign fault multipliers.

1. Display the fault list. Click the Check Fault Name List button
located near the bottom of the panel. A list of all faults that
intersect the active grid displays in the Fault Name list.

2. Select the fault. Click the fault name for which you want to change
the multiplier value. The row highlights and the associated Fault
Multiplier field activates.

3. Enter the multiplier value for the fault. Click in the Fault
Multiplier field for the selected fault and enter a value of zero
(sealed), 1 (fully conductive), or an intermediate decimal value
indicating partial transmissibility.

R5000.0.1 Multipliers - Overrides: Named Fault Multipliers 207

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

208 Multipliers - Overrides: Named Fault Multipliers R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Defining Aquifer Data

Introduction

Within the Nexus® application, boundary flux is handled by including source/

sink terms in the interblock flow equations for edge blocks. The outer
boundaries of the grid are normally treated as sealing barriers to flow. This
option lets you fine-tune a model by using an aquifer influence to represent a
surrounding body of water.

A radial aquifer geometry is assumed as shown below. The aquifer and

the reservoir communicate through the boundary AB. The water influx
from the aquifer into the reservoir is the response to pressure changes at
this boundary.

ra

A Aquifer
re
Reservoir

θ B

R5000.0.1 Defining Aquifer Data: Introduction 209

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Two types of aquifers can be modelled:

• Carter-Tracy method provides good approximations to the Van

Everdingen and Hurst analytical solutions for influx.

• Fetkovich method uses a pseudo steady-state aquifer productivity

index and an aquifer material balance to represent the system.

Each option is described.

210 Defining Aquifer Data: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Create Multiple Aquifers

The Region Management options let you create and select multiple
aquifers for definition. These options are located on the bottom of the
pane.

Procedures adding aquifers are the same as those described in “Region

Management” on page 113

R5000.0.1 Defining Aquifer Data: Create Multiple Aquifers 211

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Define Carter-Tracey Aquifer

Perform the following steps to define an aquifer using the Carter-

Tracey method.

1. Select the method. Under the Aquifer Type pane, click to activate
the Carter-Tracy option. The properties for the Carter-Tracey
method open.

2. Specify Carter and Tracy Model B1 parameter (mandatory). Click

in the Carter and Tracy Model B1 parameter entry field and
enter the B1 value, where the parameter B1 as defined by Carter
and Tracy, rb/psia (cm/kPa) is:

2
2π φ c hr s
t e
B1 = ----------------------------
-
α1

where

φ = Average porosity of the “aquifer”

expressed as a fraction.

ct = Total compressibility of the fluid and

rock in the “aquifer”, 1/psia (1/kPa).

h = Net thickness of the “aquifer”, ft (m).

re = Radius to the perimeter of the reservoir,

ft (m). (The boundary between the
reservoir and the “aquifer”.)

s = Fraction of a circle that the boundary

between the reservoir and the aquifer
completes.

α1 = 5.6146 for conventional units. 1.0 for

metric units.

3. Specify dimensionless time value (mandatory). Click in the TC

Dimensionless Time Conversion Factor entry field and enter the
value used to convert time to dimensionless time, 1/day defined as:

α2 k
tc = -------------------
-2
ct φ μ d

212 Defining Aquifer Data: Define Carter-Tracey Aquifer R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

where:

α2 = 0.006328 for conventional units;

8.527x10-5 for metric units.

k = Average permeability of the “aquifer”,

md (md).

μ = Average viscosity of the fluid contained

in the “aquifer”, cp (cp).

d = re as described above for radial

“aquifers”. Length of the “aquifer”, ft
(m) for linear “aquifers”.

4. Specify water influx linear multiplier. Click in the Water Influx

Linear Multiplier entry field and enter an optional linear
multiplier to apply to the water influx. This can be used to adjust
the strength of the aquifer without the need to change the
parameters. Default is 1.

5. Specify initial aquifer pressure. Click in the Initial Aquifer

Pressure entry field and enter the pressure value at the reference
depth. Then click in the at Reference Depth of entry field and
enter the reference depth for the initial aquifer pressure.

6. Specify aquifer properties and geometry. Click the button to

open the Carter-Tracy Aquifer Parameters dialog box. Enter the
following information about the aquifer:

• Average porosity, permeability, and fluid viscosity

• Total rock plus fluid compressibility

• Net thickness

• Radius to reservoir perimeter

• Circle fraction completed by aquifer-reservoir boundary

7. If necessary, deactivate infinite radial aquifer option and provide

pressure vs. time table. The default is to assume an infinite radial

R5000.0.1 Defining Aquifer Data: Define Carter-Tracey Aquifer 213

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

aquifer. Deactivate this toggle to open the Pressure vs. Time

Aquifer Table as shown below.

Deactivated Infinite Radial Aquifer

toggle

Pressure vs. Time Aquifer Table

Right mouse button menu table-

building options

Use the right mouse button table building options as described in

“Building Tables” on page 118 to enter values of dimensionless
time (td = tc * t), and dimensionless pressure.

Pressure vs. Time Aquifer Table Guidelines

The first line of the table must have both infinite time and infinite pressure
set equal to zero. Enough values should be entered to extend to
dimensionless times beyond the time to be simulated, or until a linear
extrapolation of the last two values will provide satisfactory results.

214 Defining Aquifer Data: Define Carter-Tracey Aquifer R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Define Fetkovich Aquifer

Perform the following steps to define an aquifer using the Fetkovich

method.

1. Select the method. Under the Aquifer Type pane, click to activate
the Fetkovich option. The properties for the Fetkovich method
open.

2. Specify aquifer productivity index. Click in the entry field and

enter the aquifer productivity index, rb/day/psi(m3/day/kPa).
(Total influx rate per day per unit pressure difference.)

7.08 ⋅ k ⋅ h
pi = -------------------------------------, for radial flow
re
μ ⎛ ln ⎛ ----⎞ – α 3⎞
⎝ ⎝ r o⎠ ⎠

α4 ⋅ k ⋅ b ⋅ h
pi = ----------------------------, for linear flow
μd

where

k = Average permeability of the

“aquifer”, md (md).

h = Net thickness of the “aquifer”, ft (m).

ro = Radius to the perimeter of the

reservoir, ft (m). (The boundary
between the reservoir and the
“aquifer.”)

re = Radius to the perimeter of the

aquifer, ft (m).

α3 = 0.75 for no-flow outer boundary; 0

for constant pressure outer boundary.

α4 = 3.381 for no-flow outer boundary;

1.127 for constant pressure outer
boundary.

R5000.0.1 Defining Aquifer Data: Define Fetkovich Aquifer 215

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

b = Width of the linear aquifer, ft (m).

μ = Average viscosity of the fluid

contained in the “aquifer”, cp (cp).

d = re as described above for radial

“aquifers.” Length of the “aquifer”, ft
(m) for linear “aquifers.”

3. Specify initial volume of encroachable water (optional, see step 4).

Click in the entry field and enter the initial volume of encroachable
water, , rb (cm) awip = ct wi pi.

where

ct = Total compressibility of the fluid and

rock in the “aquifer”, 1/psia (1/kPa).

wi = Initial aquifer volume of water in

place, rb(cm).

pi = Initial aquifer pressure at the

hydrocarbon/water contact, or at the
specified reference depth, if entered,
psia (kPa).

4. Specify initial volume of water in place and total fluid and rock
compressibility (optional, see step 3). Click in the entry fields and
enter the volume of water in place (as defined above)

Then enter the total compressibility of the rock and fluid in the
aquifer, 1/psia (1/kPa).

5. Specify initial aquifer pressure and reference depth. Enter the

initial aquifer pressure, psia (k/Pa). Then enter the reference
depth., ft. (m).

Aquifer Connection to Reservoir Grid

These options are not valid for the Nexus software.

216 Defining Aquifer Data: Define Fetkovich Aquifer R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Aquifer Connection to Reservoir Grid

The Aquifer Connection to Reservoir Grid section lets you attach the
aquifer to either a single gridblock (top table) or to a gridblock range
(bottom table).

When specifying aquifer connections to the grid, the right mouse

button menu options let you add a row to the bottom of the table or
delete a selected row as shown below.

Perform the following steps to attach the aquifer to the grid

1. Specifying gridblocks Click in the entry field and click the up or

down stepper arrow beside I, J, K (single gridblock) or I to I, J
to J, K to K (gridblock range) to specify the gridblocks to attach.

2. Specify the scale factor. Click the down arrow in the Scale
Factor field to select the scale factor used to allocate the total
“aquifer” influx/efflux among the gridblocks attached to the
“aquifer”. These are normalized within the program, so values
have only relative meaning. They will usually reflect the cross-
sectional area times the permeability of the gridblock faces
attached to the “aquifer”. Options are:

• =n Scale factor is set to “n”.

• +n Scale factor is increased by “n”.
• n Scale factor is increased by “n”.
• -n Scale factor is decreased by “n”.
• *n Scale factor is multiplied by “n”.
• /n Scale factor is divided by “n”.
• XCALC Scale factor is calculated in the x(r) direction.
• YCALC Scale factor is calculated in the y(theta) direction.
• ZCALC Scale factor is calculated in the z direction.

R5000.0.1 Defining Aquifer Data: Aquifer Connection to Reservoir Grid 217

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

If you are attaching the aquifer to a grid section, there are six
additional options which enable you to assign an aquifer to an
irregular grid boundary. Starting on the specified face of the
window and moving inward, the aquifer is attached to the first
active gridblock encountered within the window. The options are:

• I- Aquifer connects to the i- faces

• I+ Aquifer connects to the i+ faces
• J- Aquifer connects to the j- faces
• J+ Aquifer connects to the j+ faces
• K- Aquifer connects to the k- faces
• K+ Aquifer connects to the k+ faces

218 Defining Aquifer Data: Aquifer Connection to Reservoir Grid R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Working with Production Data

Introduction

SimDataStudio™ provides all the features you need to prepare

production data for use in a simulation. You can:

• Import production data into the worksheet

• View production data one well at a time

• Change worksheet values, column widths, or display formats

• Automatically plot the data

• Manually adjust the display or formatting of plotted data

• Average the production data

• Search for and edit data where wells switch function (e.g.,
producer to injector, gas injector to water injector)

• Generate well types and constraints

The procedures for performing the tasks listed above are provided on
the following pages of this chapter.

The first step in compiling data for the SimDataStudio software is to

import production history data from the OpenWorks® software or a
prepared file, or to build a production history from scratch by typing it
directly into the worksheet area of the main window.

Production data can be imported from an OpenWorks database or plain

text data file in comma-delimited format or in columns separated by
tabs or blank spaces. Assuming the data is formatted in a consistent
way, the SimDataStudio software can easily “parse” the formatted file
and help you determine the purpose and contents of each column of
data in the file.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Introduction 219

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

The import process uses a “wizard” that displays the incoming data,
lets you set certain defaults for dates and units, and lets you edit the
column headings, as appropriate. The procedures for importing data
vary slightly, depending on whether you are importing from the
OpenWorks software or a plain text file. Use the appropriate procedure
on the following pages.

220 Working with Production Data: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Importing Production Data

Refer to “Import File Examples” on page 239 for more information on

import file formats and restrictions.

To import production data, follow these steps:

Openworks Data
1. Select Production Data > Import Production Data. The Select
Data Source dialog box opens.

Click the button that corresponds to the data source and click OK.

Using Nexus® without the OpenWorks software

If you are not in using the OpenWorks software or if you select to import
from an ASCII file, proceed to Step 1.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 221

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

If you selected an OpenWorks data store (with no project or well

list previously selected), the Select Project and Select Well dialog
boxes open. The Select Project dialog box is shown below.

2. Click on the project to select and click OK. The Select Well List
dialog box opens.

3. Click on a well list to select it and click OK.

Changing a Project or Well List

You receive the Select Project and Select Well List dialog box only when
you first log in. If you wish to change project or wells, exit the
SimDataStudio software and use the Openworks -> Project Administration
-> Project Change option. When you reopen the SimDataStudio software,
your change will be reflected in the new session.

222 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

The first Import Production Data wizard opens.

4. Review the data and set the options as follows:

Field How It Works

Choose data Available data columns display at the top of the dialog box.
columns to By default, all will be imported. Click the Ignore Data toggle
import if you do not want to import a column.
Choose Date Click the appropriate toggle to specify how the dates in the
Format production data file should be interpreted. Options are: day,
month, and year delimited by slashes (D/M/Y); month, day,
and year delimited by slashes (M/D/Y), or days.
Data The OpenWorks software allows production data to be
provider stored by provider (i.e., application such as TOW/CS®) that
populates the database with production data. Click on the
arrow and select the source to import.
Zones to This option lets you choose which zone(s) to import. For
import example, the default Import All Zones sums the production
data for all existing zones in each well selected. You can
choose to sum any or all zones for all imported wells,
depending on the simulation area of interest.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 223

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Field How It Works

Production The OpenWorks software associates each production data
date is end of record with a specific date (for monthly import).
production Within the TOW/CS software, this date is always the last
interval day of the month. Thus, this option does not appear.
For other data providers, activate the toggle to specify that
the date is the end of the production interval. For example, if
the data is 1/1/2000, an activated toggle specifies that the
production date is for 12/99. If not activated, the production
date is for 1/2000.
Choose Once the data is imported and interpreted, you can easily
Display display the dates in U.S. format (month-day-year), Euro
Format format (day-month-year) or as days since the beginning of
the first production interval. This is simply a matter of
convenience for ease of use, and does not affect
interpretation of the data.

When the data is complete, click OK. The second Import Data
Wizard opens.

224 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

5. Review the data and set the options as follows:

Field How It Works

Date Select the desired Import from and Import to date for your
Selection data. The dates shown here are the default start and end dates
of the production data. It is not recommended that you
change the Start Date, however you may want to set the End
Date much later than the end date of your production data if
you want to simulate a production run that continues well
into the future.
You can click on the date to retype it, or you can click the
down arrow icon to select from a calendar.

If the calendar appears, use the double arrow icons to change

the year and the single arrow icons to change the month.
Once the desired date appears, click to select it.
Well Click on the well name to select. Or hold down the control
Selection key and click to select multiple wells.
Add Sum Activate this toggle if you wish to export the production/
over Zones injection sums by zone to the OpenWorks database. The
of SimDataStudio software will write the summation to the
Production OpenWorks Production Data Mart (PDM) tables using
Data to the “Nexus” as the data source and “SUM” as the zone name.
OpenWorks There is currently a limit of one “SUM” record per well. If
software zones/wells selected are changed or re-summarized, you will
be prompted to choose whether or not to replace the existing
OpenWorks “SUM” zone.
Deactivate this toggle to speed up the import process if you
do not wish to export the sums to the OpenWorks software.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 225

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Field How It Works

Action If you have no existing production data, or no duplication
Selection between existing and imported data, this field remains
inactive.
If you have existing production data and you are importing
new wells over the same date intervals, this field displays the
following options:

Click the button for the load option you want:

• Replace current production data: this will overwrite
existing data with imported data.
• Add new wells to current production data: this will
import only the production data associated with new wells.
If you have existing production data and you are importing
new date intervals for existing wells, this field displays the
following options:

Click the button for the load option you want:

• Replace current production data: this will overwrite
existing data with imported data.
• Add new production data entries for existing wells: this
will append data for new date ranges only.
If you have existing production data and you are importing
both new wells and new date intervals, this field displays all
of the loading options:

Click the button for the load option you want:

• Replace current production data: this will overwrite
existing data with imported data.
• Add new wells to current production data: this will
import only the production data associated with new wells.
• Add new production data entries for existing wells: this
will append data for new date ranges only.
• Add all new wells and new entries to current
production data: this will append both production data
associated with new wells and new date intervals.

226 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

The OpenWorks data is imported into the SimDataStudio software.

Active Field Surveillance (AFS) Data

1. If you selected to import the production data from an ASCII file as
shown below, the file selection dialog box opens. The default file
type is AFS but any text file can be selected.

2. Select the file to be imported from the file list in the center of this
dialog box. This places the selected name in the File name field. If
you do not see the desired file, use the Look in drop-down list to
locate the folder where the data file is located.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 227

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

3. Click the Open button to begin reading in the data file. This opens
the first page of a wizard used to import the data:

The wizard gives you a preview of the production data in the file,
with a scrollbar that you can use to scroll down through the data
and review it. Several option buttons along the bottom are preset
based on the User Options you chose in the previous chapter.

4. Review the data and set the data options as follows:

Field How It Works

Change Date Click this check box if you want to specify how the dates in
Format the production data file should be interpreted. A special
drop-down list appears, with up to 19 different choices for
how the date column can be interpreted. For instance, D/M/
Y means to interpret the dates as day, followed by month,
followed by year, separated by slashes.
Add Missing Click this check box if you want the software to assume a set
Rows for frequency for production values. When activated, selection
Frequency fields open to let you define the frequency. The program will
then add a null date entry for missing periods.
Choose This shows your default units as selected in the User Options
Units dialog box (discussed in previous chapter). Change if
necessary.

228 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

5. Click the Next button when finished to continue to the next panel
of the wizard.

If the program is unable to interpret the day/hour format (e.g., if

the date of each production interval is expressed as “days” rather
than in a standard date format such as D/M/Y, you will see the
following dialog box.

6. Enter the correct start date and click the OK button to continue to
the next panel of the wizard.

For each column of data in the file, the SimDataStudio software

attempts to identify the column heading, column title and data
type. This page of the wizard shows the results of this
interpretation process, and lets you adjust the formatting selections
column-by-column.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 229

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

7. Use the horizontal scrollbar to review all the columns parsed. Use
the Back button if necessary to compare each column to the
displayed version of the original data file.

8. Make changes as necessary. To change the column title, click on it

and select one of the options from the drop-down list.

Click Column
Title field to open
drop-down list

Some selections provide additional options, such as the volume/

rate/cum radio buttons shown in the previous illustration.

You can write a column of data to an OBS file by selecting the

“Not Recognized” option on the Column Title drop-down menu,
activating the Export to OBS toggle, and entering the class name
in the bottom field as shown below.

Select “Not Recognized” from

Column Title field to open drop-
down list
Enter description

Activate Export to OBS toggle

Enter Class Name

230 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

You can specify the units your production data is in. The software
will convert the data from the specified units to those required by
the Nexus software:

Metric Units
Liquid (Oil, Water)
Volume Cubic meters (STCM) Thousand cubic meters (MSTCM)
Rate Cubic meters/Day (STCM/Day) Thousand Cubic meters/Day
(MSTCM/Day)
Cumulative Thousand Cubic meters Million Cubic meters (MMSTCM)
(MSTCM)
Gas
Volume Cubic meters (SCM) Thousand Cubic meters (MSCM)
Rate Cubic meter/Day (SCM/Day) Thousand Cubic meters/Day
(MSCM/Day)
Cumulative Thousand Cubic meters (MSCM) Million Cubic meters (MMSCM)
Field Units
Liquid (Oil, Water)
Volume Barrels (STB) Thousand Barrels (MSTB)
Rate Barrels/Day Thousand Barrels/Day (MSTB/Day)
(STB/Day)
Cumulative Thousand Barrels (MSTB) Million Barrels (MMSTB)
Gas
Volume Thousand Cubic Feet (MSCF) Million Cubic Feet
(MMSCF)
Rate Thousand Cubic Feet/Day Million Cubic Feet/Day
(MSCF/Day) (MMSCF/Day)
Cumulative Million Cubic Feet (MMSCF) Thousand Million Cubic Feet
(MMMSCF)

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 231

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Or you can activate the Enter Conversion Factor toggle and enter a
conversion rate to the specified units. In the example below,
gallons are converted to STB.

Select conversion option

Enter conversion rate

You can also deselect data field(s) for import by clicking the
Ignore Data toggle. (Click Import Data toggle to reselect.)

9. Click the Next button when finished to continue to the next panel
of the wizard.

10. Review the data and set the data options as follows:

Field How It Works

Well Click on the well name to select. Or hold down the control
Selection key and click to select multiple wells.

232 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Field How It Works

Data Range Select the desired Start Date and End Date for your list of
Selection dates. The dates shown here are the default start and end
dates of the production data. It is not recommended that you
change the Start Date, however you may want to set the End
Date much later than the end date of your production data if
you want to simulate a production run that continues well
into the future.
You can click on the date to retype it, or you can click the
down arrow icon to select from a calendar.

If the calendar appears, use the double arrow icons to change

the year and the single arrow icons to change the month.
Once the desired date appears, click to select it.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 233

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Field How It Works

Action If you have no existing production data, or no duplication
Selection between existing and imported data, this field remains
inactive.
If you have existing production data and you are importing
new wells over the same date intervals, this field displays the
following options:

Click the button for the load option you want:

• Replace current production data: this will overwrite
existing data with imported data.
• Add new wells to current production data: this will
import only the production data associated with new wells.
If you have existing production data and you are importing
new date intervals for existing wells, this field displays the
following options:

Click the button for the load option you want:

• Replace current production data: this will overwrite
existing data with imported data.
• Add new production data entries for existing wells: this
will append data for new date ranges only.
If you have existing production data and you are importing
both new wells and new date intervals, this field displays all
of the loading options:

Click the button for the load option you want:

• Replace current production data: this will overwrite
existing data with imported data.
• Add new wells to current production data: this will
import only the production data associated with new wells.
• Add new production data entries for existing wells: this
will append data for new date ranges only.
• Add all new wells and new entries to current
production data: this will append both production data
associated with new wells and new date intervals.

234 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Refer to “Examples of Appending Production Data to a Case with

Production Data” on page 246 for more description of merging and
appending well data.

11. When finished, click the Finish button at the bottom of the wizard.

At this point, the SimDataStudio software begins reading the

production data into the worksheet area of the display. When the
data is finished loading, you may see an optional dialog box
(shown below):

This dialog appears if the SimDataStudio software detects either of

two conditions:
• “Well switchover” effect within a data time interval. This
occurs if any time interval shows non-zero flows for both
production and injection on the same well -- indicating that the
well is in the process of switching from production to injection
(or vice versa). It is important to identify these switchover
patterns at some point before you finish working with the case,
because the Nexus software will require the data to show either
production or injection -- not both within the same timestep.

• Undefined values (recorded in the OpenWorks software and as

negative numbers in ASCII files) are replaced by an “X”.

For more details, see “Searching for Inconsistent Data” on

page 260.

12. Select one of the following options to indicate whether you want to
correct the data now or later:

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 235

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

• Scroll through ... You can immediately search the data to

identify well switchover patterns and undefined values. See
“Manual Search for Switchovers” on page 261. Or use the
Check Production Data Consistency option on the
Production menu to reopen this dialog box at any time.

• Let program take action ... You can let the program
automatically correct switchovers and/or undefined values.
When you select the option, the dialog box expands to provide
the following options.

For switchovers, you can select to have the program create a

switchover date as described in “Searching for Inconsistent
Data” on page 260.

For undefined values, you can select to zero the values,

interpolate them from the values above and below, or zero
injection values and interpolate the others.

236 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

13. Click the OK button when finished to close the Consistency

Summary dialog box.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 237

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Adjusting the Start Date

It is assumed that the production history file you are importing contains
rows of projection or injection data keyed to specific historical dates.
For example, the first few lines of your data file may look like this:

*MM/DD/YYYY *OIL *WATER *GAS *WINJ *GINJ *PRESS *WELL N1

05/01/1988 4140.32 0.00 1950.05 0.00 0.00 3931.81
06/01/1988 3918.73 0.00 1845.68 0.00 0.00 3940.77

As the data is being imported into the SimDataStudio software, the

program automatically assigns a “start date” for the production history
cycle based on the way it interprets these first few lines of data.

In the example shown above, it assumes that the data represents

monthly production, and that the production values apply to the entire
month. Based on this logic, it assumes that production started on April
1, 1988 and that the data given on 5/1/1988 is for the prior month
period from 4/1/1988 and 5/1/1988.

If the date is in other formats, the SimDataStudio software takes action

as follows:

Date Format Action Taken

D/M/Y or M/D/Y Production interval is calculated by subtracting first entry
date from second entry date. Start date is calculated by
subtracting production interval from first date.
M/Y Dates are interpreted as 1/M/Y or M/1/Y, then production
interval and start date are calculated as above.
Days Special dialog box will appear to ask for start date.

Regardless of what the system puts as a start date, you can always
change the start date using Production Data > Change Production
Interval Start Date. When you select this option, the following dialog
box opens:

Enter the correct start date and click the OK button.

238 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Import File Examples

Format restrictions and specifications for ASCII and PA files are
described below.

PA File Formats
The SimDataStudio software will accept PA files with the following
two formats.

Old Format
The old format is:

WELL (DATE or DATE format) HEADER1 HEADER2 … HEADERn

Name1 date1 val1(1) val2(1) … valn(1)
| | | | |
Name1 datek val1(k) val2(k) … valn(k)
Name2 date1 val1(1) val2(1) … valn(1)
| | | | |
Name2 datek val1(k) val2(k) … valn(k)
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
NameN date1 val1(1) val2(1) … valn(1)
| | | | |
NameN datek val1(k) val2(k) … valn(k)

Where:

• The first line contains the header.

• The first column header must be WELL or NAME and the second
DATE or a date format, the following headers identify the type of
production data being imported.

• In order to be imported, a line of data must contain first the correct

well name on the first entry, a valid increasing date on the next
entry followed by the same number of items than specified in the
header: all other lines will be ignored.

• Items must be separated by blank space or tab separator.

• Only positive real values are de facto imported into the

SimDataStudio software, all other values (including negative

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 239

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

values or character symbol) will be marked as undefined (X

symbol).

Example:

Well Date Qg Qo Qw thp

B01 1/1/98 25.64 10.25 2.34 80.43
B01 2/1/98 24.32 12.43 1.45 79.12
B01 3/1/98 25.32 14.12 2.54 76.54
B01 4/1/98 22.31 -1 2.43 75.43
B01 5/1/98 21.23 13.21 3.45 ?
B01 6/1/98 19.45 12.12 4.56 73.45
B01 7/1/98 X 11.65 4.23 74.56
B01 8/1/98 24.65 13.54 2.34 72.34
B01 9/1/98 23.43 11.12 3.22 71.34
B01 10/1/98 20.43 15.23 2.54 70.12
B02 1/1/98 44.54 20.25 7.37 96.59
B02 2/1/98 54.38 12.73 4.55 94.42
B02 3/1/98 27.32 24.12 4.74 93.64
B02 4/1/98 52.31 25.64 2.03 X
B02 5/1/98 27.23 23.91 7.48 90.02
B02 6/1/98 39.45 22.18 5.56 88.48
B02 7/1/98 35.76 21.65 3.28 87.66
B02 8/1/98 24.95 23.84 6.94 86.37
B02 9/1/98 43.43 21.12 5.22 85.74
B02 10/1/98 50.43 25.03 4.58 83.10

240 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

On importing the above example, well B01 will appeared as followed

on the production data spreadsheet view:

New Format
The new format is:

DATE (or DATE format) HEADER1 HEADER2 … HEADERn

WELL Name1
date1 val1(1) val2(1) … valn(1)
| | | |
datek val1(k) val2(k) … valn(k)
WELL Name2
date1 val1(1) val2(1) … valn(1)
| | | |
datek val1(k) val2(k) … valn(k)
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
WELL NameN
date1 val1(1) val2(1) … valn(1)
| | | |
datek val1(k) val2(k) … valn(k)

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 241

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Where:

• The first line contains the header.

• The first column header must be DATE or a date format, the

following column headers identify the type of production data
being imported.

• After the header and before production data entries for each well, a
line with the keyword WELL or NAME plus the well name must
be entered

• In order to be imported, a line of data must contain first a valid

increasing date followed by the same number of values than
specified in the header: all other lines will be ignored.

• Only positive real values are de facto imported into the

SimDataStudio software, all other values (including negative
values or character symbol) will be marked as undefined (X
symbol).

242 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Example:

m/d/yy Qg Qo Qw thp
Well B01
1/1/98 25.64 10.25 2.34 80.43
2/1/98 24.32 12.43 1.45 79.12
3/1/98 25.32 14.12 2.54 76.54
4/1/98 22.31 -1 2.43 75.43
5/1/98 21.23 13.21 3.45 ?
6/1/98 19.45 12.12 4.56 73.45
7/1/98 X 11.65 4.23 74.56
8/1/98 24.65 13.54 2.34 72.34
9/1/98 23.43 11.12 3.22 71.34
10/1/98 20.43 15.23 2.54 70.12
1/1/98 44.54 20.25 7.37 96.59
2/1/98 54.38 12.73 4.55 94.42
3/1/98 27.32 24.12 4.74 93.64
4/1/98 52.31 25.64 2.03 X
5/1/98 27.23 23.91 7.48 90.02
6/1/98 39.45 22.18 5.56 88.48
7/1/98 35.76 21.65 3.28 87.66
8/1/98 24.95 23.84 6.94 86.37
9/1/98 43.43 21.12 5.22 85.74
10/1/98 50.43 25.03 4.58 83.10

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 243

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Other ASCII Files

Production data contained in other common ASCII format files can be
imported directly into the SimDataStudio software. The import
procedure is very similar to that of the AFS file, except that the type of
separator can be specified and the columns of data do not have to
follow any particular order:

• Item separator must be either a tab delimiter, a comma delimiter or

blank space(s) delimiter. The SimDataStudio software will try to
guess the type of separator used and the number of data column of
the file, and show both on step 1 of the import wizard. If the guess
is wrong for any reason, both separator type and number of data
column can be re-specified on step 1 of the import wizard.

• There must be a column containing the wells names and another

one for the date each record refers to. The well name column and
date column can be any of the column, they have to be identified in
step 2 of the import wizard.

• Header line is optional. If found the SimDataStudio software will

try to use it to guess the types for each column in step 2 of the
import wizard. If omitted the user will have to specify in the same
step 2 the column for the well name, the column for the date plus
the type for all other columns.

• In order to be imported, a line of data must contain a well name, a

valid increasing date and a number of values equal to the number
of data column specified in step 1 minus 2: all other lines will be
ignored.

• Only positive real values are de facto imported into the

SimDataStudio software. All other values (including negative
values or character symbol) will be marked as undefined (X
symbol).

244 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Examples (Comma Separator with Header):

DATE, NAME, OIL, WATER, GAS

90/1, Well01, 1200., 200., 2456.
90/2, Well01, 2200., 210., 2466.
90/3, Well01, 1800., 220., 2426.
90/4, Well01, 1800., 220., 2426.
90/5, Well01, 1500., 230., 2476.
90/6, Well01, 1600., 230., 2356.
90/7, Well01, 1700., 240., 2356.
90/8, Well01, 1500., 240., 2656.
90/9, Well01, 1700., 260., 2656.

Examples (Blank Separator with No Header):

01 90 Well01 1200. 200. 2456.

02 90 Well01 2200. 210. 2466.
03 90 Well01 1800. 220. 2426.
04 90 Well01 1800. 220. 2426.
05 90 Well01 1500. 230. 2476.
06 90 Well01 1600. 230. 2356.
07 90 Well01 1700. 240. 2356.
08 90 Well01 1500. 240. 2656.
09 90 Well01 1700. 260. 2656.
10 90 Well01 1600. 260. 2756.
11 90 Well01 1500. 250. 2756.
12 90 Well01 1400. 300. 2856.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 245

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Examples of Appending Production Data to a Case with Production Data

The SimDataStudio software can handle the following scenarios when
importing a production data file on top of a case with existing
production data:

• Append production data for extra wells to existing production data

with same production interval.

• Append new production data columns to existing production data

with same production interval.

• Append new production data records to existing production data.

• Any combination of three above appends.

The file must be imported following step 1 and step 2 of the import
wizard. On step 3 the user can specify either to replace the current
production data or to append the imported production data to the
current one.

246 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Append Production Data for Extra Wells to Existing Production

Data with Same Production Interval
If any extra well is found in the imported production data file, this
option will be available on step 3 of the import wizard.

Example
Current production data has only well B01 with data from 01/12/1997
to 01/10/1998:

Importing a data file with production data for B02 from 01/12/1997 to
01/10/1998, step 1 of the import wizard:

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 247

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Step 3 of the import wizard now shows the following:

Select “Add new wells to current production data”, well B02 and
Finish. The case production data will now have production data
available for well B01 and B02 from 01/12/1997 to 01/10/1998.

Append New Production Data Records to Existing Production Data

If new production data records are found for existing wells, this option
will be available on step 3 of the import wizard.

Current production data is available for well B02 from 01/12/1997 to

01/08/1998:

248 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

We import now a production data file with production data for well B02
from 01/08/1998 to 01/10/1998, step1 of the wizard:

Step 3 of the wizard now gives the option to append the new entries:

Select “Add new production data entries for existing wells” well
B02 and press Finish button, the case has now production data
available for well B02 from 01/12/1997 to 01/10/1998 for Gas, Oil,
Water production and Tubing-Head pressure.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Importing Production Data 249

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Reviewing and Editing the Worksheet

The Production Data worksheet gives you complete functionality to

review and edit production data on the screen. Use the horizontal and
vertical scrollbars to view all columns and rows in the worksheet.

Scroll down
Scroll right to view more columns to view more rows

Viewing Production Data by Well Hierarchy

Once you have imported production data, the worksheet shows all the
data for a particular portion of the well management hierarchy. You can
view the data by well, by gathering center, by flow station, or by field.
This assumes, however, that a hierarchy has already been defined for
the data (see “Global Options” on page 346).

If a multi-level hierarchy is available within the data, you will see up/
down arrow buttons at the far right below the Production Data
worksheet. Clicking these buttons moves the worksheet display level
up or down and changes the types of data you can view.

250 Working with Production Data: Reviewing and Editing the Worksheet R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

For instance, the following drop-down lists are available at the bottom
of the Production Data worksheet when the level is set to “gathering
center.” At this level, you can select a specific gathering center (on the
right), and then view the data for each well in the gathering center.

Change data view to: First well Previous well Next well Last well

Gathering center
selected

Other levels and data view options are listed below:

Level Selected View Data By

Field Area
Area Flow station
Flow station Gathering center
Gathering center Well

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Reviewing and Editing the Worksheet 251
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Changing the Worksheet

It is not commonly done; however, you can retype the value of any cell
in the worksheet, as desired. When you make changes any cell in the
worksheet, the SimDataStudio software will check to make sure your
entries are consistent. For instance, if you change a date, it will make
sure your entry uses the correct date format. If not, you will see an error
message.

You can also can insert or delete rows in the worksheet, using the right-
click shortcut menu. Follow these steps:

1. Right-click on the worksheet at the place where you want to insert

or delete a row of data, to view the shortcut menu:

2. Select the Insert or Delete option, depending on whether you want

to add a production interval or delete a production interval.

If you selected Insert, the SimDataStudio software adds a row

to the worksheet, effectively splitting the selected production
interval in half. The new row and the old row reflect half the
time and half the production volumes of the previous single
row.

If you selected Delete, the SimDataStudio software deletes the

selected row from the worksheet and adjusts the production
intervals above and below the deleted row to compensate for
the difference.

3. Review the changes that the SimDataStudio software has made,

and adjust the values in the worksheet to fine-tune the result.

252 Working with Production Data: Reviewing and Editing the Worksheet R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Changing Column Widths

You can change the width of any column by moving the mouse cursor
to the border between the columns and dragging the mouse left or right.
You can also select several columns by dragging the mouse over the
column heads until they are shaded, then drag the border of any
selected column to resize all of them.

Hiding Columns
You can temporarily hide or display columns by double-clicking the
column heading:

1. Double-clicking a displayed column hides it.

2. Double-clicking the location of a hidden column (between two

displayed columns) re-displays the hidden column.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Reviewing and Editing the Worksheet 253
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Changing the Display Format

For data shown in the Production Data worksheet, you can change the
type of data displayed, the decimal positions, or the date format. Follow
these steps:

1. Select Production Data> Properties from the SimDataStudio

menu bar, or right-click the production data worksheet area and
select Properties from the shortcut menu. This displays the
Production Data Properties control panel.

The entries in this panel vary slightly, depending on whether you

imported data from a .pa file or a plain text ASCII file.

254 Working with Production Data: Reviewing and Editing the Worksheet R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

2. Under the Display Format tab, make the following changes, as

desired.

Option How To Use It

Flow Specify how you want data displayed for each column of
Display production data. For instance, to see cumulative volumes
Format instead of daily volumes, click the Cumulative option in any
column. The SimDataStudio software will recalculate the
data to match your preferences.
Precision Specify the number of decimal positions for data display. The
Display SimDataStudio software will round off the production data
Format figures to the nearest decimal position you specify.
Date Select the most appropriate date format for your purposes.
Display The SimDataStudio software will recalculate and re-display
Format dates to match your selected format. U.S. format is month-
day-year. European format is day-month-year. The Days
option is number of days since beginning of production.

3. To test any of your selections, click the Apply button at the bottom
of the Properties dialog box.

4. When finished changing the properties, click OK to close this

dialog box and apply your changes, or Cancel to avoid making
any unapplied changes.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Reviewing and Editing the Worksheet 255
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Reviewing and Editing the Charts

You can view charts at the far right of the Production Data worksheet
by using the horizontal scrollbar (bottom of worksheet) to bring them
into view. Once the charts are in view, you can scroll up or down using
the vertical scroll bar, to see all the charts.

Scroll right to view charts

There are several different ways you can control the view of these
charts as explained on the following pages.

Zooming In and Out

The SimDataStudio software lets you easily zoom in or out for a better
view. You can use the icons on the toolbar, or the related options on the
View menu.

Icon Purpose Related View Menu Option

Zoom in on worksheet and charts View/Zoom In
(enlarge the perspective).
Zoom out on worksheet and charts View/Zoom Out
(shrink the perspective).
Return to original size. View/Original Size

Each time you select a zoom in/out function, it enlarges/shrinks both

the worksheet and the related production charts. Selecting Original
Size returns the worksheet and charts to their original size.

256 Working with Production Data: Reviewing and Editing the Charts R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Changing a Plotted Value

The charts reflect the actual data values listed in the worksheet. To
change a value in the plot, retype it in the worksheet. Make sure your
changes are consistent with the data, or the SimDataStudio software
will display an error message. When you change a value in the
worksheet, the chart reflects your change automatically.

Inserting/Removing Charts
You can control exactly which values are plotted in the worksheet area
by selecting them from a list. Follow these steps:

1. Right click on any worksheet cell and select Insert Chart from the
shortcut menu. This displays a list of available data.

The list shows all the data values available to be charted under
Available Data and all the data values that are actually charted
under Active Data. At first, these two lists are the same, indicating
that the SimDataStudio software has already charted all available
data.

2. You can move data values on/off the Active list by selecting the
data type and then clicking the arrow buttons to move it between
lists. Clicking the left arrow button moves a selected data type off
the Active list. You can move it back onto the Active list by

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Reviewing and Editing the Charts 257
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

selecting it from the Available Data column and clicking the

right-arrow button.

3. Click OK when finished to close this dialog box.

Changing the Chart Properties

To change the colors and fonts used on the production charts, follow
these steps:

1. Select Production Data> Properties from the SimDataStudio

menu bar, or right-click the production data worksheet area and
select Properties from the shortcut menu. This displays the
Production Data Properties control panel.

2. Click the Production Charts tab to see the following display.

Certain elements of this panel appear only if you have averaged
the production data already.

258 Working with Production Data: Reviewing and Editing the Charts R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

3. Under the Production Charts tab, change any of the display

options, as explained in the following table.

4. To test any of your selections, click the Apply button at the bottom
of the Properties dialog box.

5. When finished changing the properties, click OK to close this

dialog box and apply your changes, or Cancel to avoid making
any unapplied changes.

Production Chart Options

Option Purpose/How To Use It
Chart Title These are the column headings in the worksheet. Click to retype any column heading, as
desired. Use the Tab kay or Shift-Tab to move between columns.
Line Color These are the colors used to plot data values in the charts at the far right on your worksheet,
for both production data and averaged data (if available). Click any color to change it and
select a new color from the palette. For details see “Setting the Default Color and Chart
Options” on page 40.
Line Width These are the line widths (in screen pixels) used to plot data values in the production charts.
Separate widths can be specified for both production data and averaged data (if available).
Click any value and use the scroll arrows to change it, or simply retype the value.
Background This controls the background color of the production charts. Click this button to select a
new color from the palette. For details see “Setting the Default Color and Chart Options” on
page 40.
Font This controls the font used on the production charts. Click this button to select a new font
type, style, or size, then click OK when finished, or Cancel to avoid changing the font.

Horizontal Turn on this checkbox if you want horizontal grid lines to appear on the production charts.
Grid Lines
Avg. Interval Turn on this checkbox if you want vertical grid lines to appear on the charts for data
Grid Lines averaging intervals (not available unless data has been averaged).
Symbols Turn on this checkbox if you want symbols to display on the charts.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Reviewing and Editing the Charts 259
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Searching for Inconsistent Data

Production data in some time intervals may have nonzero values for
both production and injection. Such events indicate that the well is in
the process of “switching over” from a producer to an injector, from a
gas injector to a water injector, or vice versa. The SimDataStudio
software lets you easily search for these events in your production data,
so that you can review the switchover conditions and make any
adjustments necessary.

Production data may also be imported with undefined values which the
program records with an “X” in the appropriate cell.

Perform the following steps to check for well switch overs or undefined
values.

1. Select Production Data> Check for Production Data

Consistency from the main menu. This following dialog box
opens.

2. Select the appropriate radio button:

• Scroll through all - lets you manually search for and edit each
of the switchover events or undefined values. Or you can
Cancel and search another time using the Check Production
Data Consistency option on the Production Data menu.

• Let program take action to correct - lets the program mark

and edit switchovers and undefined values automatically.

3. Click the OK button to begin the process, then continue to the

appropriate section below.

260 Working with Production Data: Searching for Inconsistent Data R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Manual Search for Switchovers

If you selected to scroll the inconsistencies, the program displays a
search dialog as shown below. Follow these steps:

1. Select the appropriate Search Type:

Option What It Finds

All Well Switchover Every type of well switchover.
Intervals
Producer to Injector Only wells that switched from producer to injector.
Injector to Producer Only wells that switched from injector to producer.
Gas Injector to Water Only wells that switched from gas injector to water
Injector injector.
Water Injector to Gas Only wells that switched from water injector to gas
Injector injector.

2. Select the appropriate search Direction. You can search up or

down in the worksheet.

3. Click the Find Next button to begin searching. You can also use
Find First or Find Last to move to the first or last instance of the
selected well switchover type.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Searching for Inconsistent Data 261
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Automatic Search for Switchovers

If you selected the second option (Let program take action) on the
Switchover panel on page 260, the program automatically scans the
data and marks all switchover events with a color code in the
worksheet:

At each event, it splits the switchover into two separate intervals (i.e.,
two rows in the worksheet) -- each of which represents one half of the
switchover process. For instance, one row in the worksheet might
represent the production interval while the next row represents the
injection interval. The dates are also adjusted so that the first new
interval occurs during the first half of the original interval, and the
second new interval occurs during the second half of the original
interval. Follow these steps to review and edit the changes:

1. Scroll through the worksheet and review the color-coded entries.

2. Make any adjustments to the data, as necessary, to correctly reflect

real-word conditions.

262 Working with Production Data: Searching for Inconsistent Data R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Averaging the Data

Before generating type and constraints from production data, you may
want to use the data averaging option to average your production data
over fixed intervals or varying intervals defined within date ranges.
This process helps make sure that no data values are misapplied to the
wrong intervals during the reservoir simulation run. For example, the
following worksheet display shows production data averaged over a
uniform three-month interval.

Two procedures are included on the following pages. The first

procedure shows how to actually accomplish the data averaging
process. The second procedure shows how to interactively adjust the
results by using the mouse and charts.

How Averaging Affects the Data in Cases of Well Switchover

Special situations may occur where a well changes type at some point in the
production history, such as from production to injection, or vice versa. The
averaging process will not honor such changes in well type if any production
interval shows nonzero flow in both the production and injection columns. To
solve this problem, you should first perform a Well Switchover search before
averaging the data. The well switchover search automatically adjusts the
production intervals so that the switching well does not have two types of flow in
the same interval. Instead it will split the interval in two and assign production to
one of the subintervals and injection to the other. Once this happens, averaging
can proceed without further problems. To search for well switchovers, see
“Searching for Inconsistent Data” on page 260.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Averaging the Data 263

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Setting Up and Performing the Averaging

When you are ready to start averaging the data, use the following steps:

1. Select Production Data> Average Production Data from the

SimDataStudio menu bar, or right-click the production data
worksheet area and select Average Production Data from the
shortcut menu. This displays the Data List Selection panel.

This panel shows the Start Date and End Date for the production
data. You can select a Frequency for averaging and see the
resulting interval dates in the Date List, or you can define varying
intervals between data ranges.

2. Specify the interval. You can specify the interval in one of two
ways:

• To specify a fixed interval: Use the scroll arrows to increment

or decrement the Frequency value, and watch how this
changes the Date List. You can average data over any interval
desired, including the current interval (e.g., one month).

• To specify varying intervals: Click the Advanced button on the

bottom, right side of the dialog box. The box expands to
display a set of variable options as shown below.

advanced
options

264 Working with Production Data: Averaging the Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Note that the Advanced and Regular buttons let you move
between the dialog box for each option.

The default start and end dates correspond to the production

start and end dates.

Click the Add Interval button. The Select Date dialog box
opens.

Click the down arrow icon ( ) to select the interval start date
from the calendar. Use the double arrow icons ( ) to
change the year and the single arrow icons ( ) to change the
month. Once you see the desired month/year for the Start or End
Date, click the desired date to select it.

Click OK to close the Select Date dialog box. The date you
entered displays in the Start Date field of the current interval and
the End Date field of the previous interval.

Click in the Frequency field. When you click in the field, scroll
arrows let you increment or decrement the frequency value from 1-
100.

Then click in the Frequency Units field. When you click in the
field, a pull-down menu lets you select between hours, days,
weeks, months, or years.

You can also click the Delete Interval button and select the start
date of intervals you want to delete as shown below.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Averaging the Data 265

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Click Apply on the Data List Selection dialog box to compute the
varying intervals.

You must click Apply...

Note that you must click the Apply button for the varying intervals to be
computed.

3. Once you have chosen the desired frequency, click the OK button
to average the data based on that frequency.

You can also use the Cancel button to close this panel without
averaging the data. If you clicked OK above, the program adds
extra columns to the worksheet to show the averaged interval and
the data averaged over that interval (see picture on previous page).
It also updates the charts to the right of the worksheet area.

4. Make sure the data has been averaged to your satisfaction. The
SimDataStudio software will use this data when generating the
simulation data file. Averaging should not skip important dates
such as a well shut-in. You can manually change any value in the
worksheet and the data will be re-averaged automatically.

266 Working with Production Data: Averaging the Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Interactively Adjusting Averaged Data

You can view averaged data in the charts to the right of the Production
Data worksheet, and interactively adjust the averaged data intervals.
Follow these steps:

1. Scroll to the right of the worksheet and view the averaged data in
the chart.

2. If you do not see the horizontal grid lines in the chart, select
Production Data> Properties then click the Production Charts
tab and turn on the Averaged Interval Grid Lines checkbox.

3. You can drag these grid lines left or right to interactively adjust the
averaging interval. To begin this process, move the mouse to the
top of the grid line until you see a large black vertical arrow
appear.

4. Without moving the mouse from its current position, hold down
the left mouse button until the arrow turns into a double white
horizontal arrow. Keep holding the mouse as you drag the grid line
left or right. As you drag the grid line, the axis annotation changes
automatically to match the current grid line position.

5. Release the mouse when the grid line is at the desired position.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Averaging the Data 267

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Generate Types and Constraints

Once you have imported the production data and defined the wells in
the Well Definition panel, the Generate Well Types and Constraints
from Production Data wizard lets you define the types and constraints.
Follow these steps:

1. Select Production Data > Generate Well Types and Constraints

from Production Data on the main menu bar. Or click the icon
on the toolbar. This displays the first panel of the Generating Well
Types and Constraints wizard:

This panel lists three types of problems with the well data as it
currently exists within your case. It shows:

• wells with no perforations defined

• wells with no production data defined

• wells that have production data but have not been defined in
the Wells Names and Locations view

2. If you have a combination of well(s) defined without production

data / wells not defined with production data, a Reconcile Wells
button activates on the form.

268 Working with Production Data: Generate Types and Constraints R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

3. Click the Reconcile Wells button to associate one well name to

another, or remove a well name. The dialog box shown below
opens.
Highlight wells to associate

Specify associated
well name

This option is useful if you have a single well listed under one or
more names. Perform the following steps to associate two wells:

• Click on the well in the list of undefined wells.

• Click on the well in the list of defined wells with no production
data.
• Click the Associate button. When you are finished, click OK.
The Reconcile Wells dialog box closes.

The two highlighted wells are associated. They display in the

Wells to Be Associated field.

Perform the following steps to remove a well.

• Click on the well name(s) to remove.

• Click the Remove Wells button. When you are finished, click
OK. The Reconcile Wells dialog box closes.

Associated wells are now listed under the well ID of the name you
specified. Removed wells are deleted from the database. Any
associated data is also removed.

4. To continue, press the Next button at the bottom of the wizard.

The next panel may look different, depending on whether or not

you have already set up well constraints in the Wells Dates

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Generate Types and Constraints 269
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

worklist. This manual assumes that you have not set up such
constraints. However, some users may have already done so.

• If you have not set up constraints on the Wells Dates

worksheet, the panel looks like this:

This panel shows the Start and End Dates of both your
simulation data and production data. It also points any
problems that may still exist with your data, such as whether
your production data needs averaging. If necessary, click the
Cancel button to return to the program and adjust the start/end
dates, or correct other problems, before restarting the wizard.

270 Working with Production Data: Generate Types and Constraints R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

• If you have already set up constraints on the Wells Dates

worksheet, the panel looks like this:

Notice that, in addition to displaying the Start and End Dates

of both your simulation data and production data, this panel
also asks you to define how it should handle well types and
constraints.

Option What It Does

Generate types and Discards any well types and constraints you have
constraints from defined and replaces them with information from the
production data production data file.
Append production The production data will be added to the simulation
data to data input data stream and the simulation end date will be
replaced with the production end date. This only
works in the case where the dates in the production
data are later than the dates in the simulation data.
Use production data Similar to the first option, but preserves well types
with data well type defined on the Well Dates panel. Constraints are
replaced with information from the production data
file, as with the first option above.
Ignore production Does not use the production data in the simulation
data input data stream. (You still have an opportunity on
the next panel to generate an observed data file from
the production data.)

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Generate Types and Constraints 271
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

5. To continue, press the Next button at the bottom of the wizard.

This displays the final panel of the wizard.

This panel shows wells defined for the simulation and lets you
control how the observed data file and BHP/THP data will be
generated.

• Any wells that have dual flow (production/injection) during a

given simulation time interval are marked in red. If you see
this, click the Cancel button and correct the problem using the
“switchover search” feature discussed on page 260, then return
to this procedure.

• If you see problems with the well definitions in general,

Cancel and use the appropriate worksheets in discussed in
earlier chapters of this manual to define wells data for wells to
be included in the simulation.

If you have on time, BHP, and/or THP data in your data, additional
fields are available for selection. Activate the BHP/THP cards to
define the limiting bottomhole pressure or tubing head pressure.

When ontime information has been loaded for production data,

activate the Generate ON TIME card for wells from production
data toggle if you want to generate ontime cards and corrected
rates (to maintain volumetric) for the wells. Otherwise, production
over the entire date interval is assumed.

272 Working with Production Data: Generate Types and Constraints R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

The observed data file can be generated directly from either the
raw or averaged production data, per your selection, and is used
primarily for history matching using the SimResults or the
PLOTVIEW™ software. Using visualization programs like the
PLOTVIEW software and the 3DVIEW™ software, you can
compare the result of your simulation to the actual production data
to determine how well your model is working. The PLOTVIEW
software shows simulated and observed data side-by-side on the
same plot for making detailed comparisons.

6. Press the Finish button at the bottom of the wizard to complete the
well types and constraints generation.

R5000.0.1 Working with Production Data: Generate Types and Constraints 273
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Clearing the Worksheet

You can clear the Production Data worksheet and start over if desired.
Follow these steps:

1. Right-click in the worksheet area to see the following shortcut

menu:

2. Select Clear Grid Data from the shortcut menu. You will see this
message:

3. Click the Yes button to clear all data from the Production Data
worksheet. Otherwise, click No.

274 Working with Production Data: Clearing the Worksheet R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Defining Simulation Utility Data

Introduction

When the production data is defined, the Utility options let you specify
simulation start date, end date, title, and solver.

1. Simulation interval and units. Set the start and ending dates for the
simulation. Select from the calendar by clicking the down arrow.
Click the toggle to select European date format (mm/dd/yy).

Click the associated pull-down menu to select the units for the
input data and the run units. The INPUT UNITS define the default
units for the input data. The RUN UNITS define the units in which
Nexus® will run. All output data will be written using RUN
UNITS. The Nexus software will perform any necessary
conversion.

R5000.0.1 Defining Simulation Utility Data: Introduction 275

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

2. Description (optional). Enter a descriptive title for the simulation

run.

3. Result files control. Click to select options that deactivate the

default to write the data directly to the VDB. Click the toggles
generate a formatted map or plot file for the entire run, regardless
of where the option appears in the run control file. You can also
select to report input keywords. Click the toggle to record the
keywords in the run control file.

4. Restart run. Click here if you want to restart the simulation.

276 Defining Simulation Utility Data: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Defining Output Options

Introduction

So far, this manual has only discussed using the Production Data
worksheet. However, there are several other types of worksheets you
can use to compile data. In particular, you can use the Output Options
worksheet to generate date records and output records that will be used
in the Nexus® simulation. You can:

• Set up a list of dates on which important events will occur,

including the start and end date.

• Generate a list of output events (PRINT, PLOT, MAPOUT, and

RESTART) that will occur during the simulation at a given
“frequency.” For instance, you may want the simulation to write a
specific set of reports every three months during the simulation.

• Edit the records, for instance, you may want to change the types
of output produced on a specific date.

• Insert additional DATE records that do not follow an easily

identifiable frequency pattern.

The procedures in this chapter explain how to perform each of the tasks
listed above. It is assumed that you understand the purpose of PRINT,
PLOT, MAPOUT, and RESTART records as explained in the Nexus
Keyword Document.

R5000.0.1 Defining Output Options: Introduction 277

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Viewing the Output Options Worksheet

To begin generating a list of dates, you must first view the Output
Options worksheet. To do this, double-click the Output Options option
in the tree diagram to the left of the worksheet display area. The
worksheet display area should now appear as follows:

This display lets you set up a list of Run Dates and then designate
various events that will occur on those dates, such as:

PRINT options - reports that will be printed on certain dates.

278 Defining Output Options: Viewing the Output Options Worksheet R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

MAP options - map records that will be generated on certain dates for
use by the 3DVIEW™ software.

Mole Fraction Map Fields for Compositional Model

If you have a compositional fluid model, you will have three additional fields
(MAPX Options, MAPY Options, and MAPZ Options). These put mile fraction
of the selected component into the map file, where X is liquid, Y is gas, and Z
is overall.

PLOT options -plot records that will be generated on certain dates for
use by the PLOTVIEW™ software.

RESTART - - restart records that will be captured on certain dates for

use in starting new simulations at different dates (use carefully since
these generate large output files that can quickly fill up your hard
drive).

OUTPUT options -- controls array printout in the simulator output

file. Also controls simulator special reports. Refer to the Output Array
and “Map Output” section of the “Control Options” chapter of the
Nexus Keyword Document.

RFT Wells option -- specifies the wells to be included in the well RFT
report.

REGION REPORT -- specifies region report data (field summary

data, region reports, recurrent data input reports, well, perforation,
network etc).

SSUM Wells option -- specifies options and variables to appear in the

spreadsheet summary files for a well, gather, flow station, area, or
region.

Note -- adding include files

Include files are now added using the External Include Data tab on the options tree
as described in “Include Files” on page 399.

R5000.0.1 Defining Output Options: Viewing the Output Options Worksheet 279
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Setting Up the Date List

Once you have opened the Output Options worksheet, use the
following procedure to start generating a list of run dates on which you
can program specific simulation events:

1. Right-click in the worksheet area to see the following shortcut

menu:

2. Select Generate New Output Date List to see the following

dialog box:

This dialog box lets you define the Start Date and End Date for
the entire list of dates that you will be generating. You can also
indicate the type and frequency for four different types of data
records: PRINT, PLOT, MAPOUT, and RESTART.

3. Select the desired Start Date and End Date for your list of
dates.Notice that these are already set to the defaults listed on the
Dates-Units tab of the User Options panel (as covered under

280 Defining Output Options: Setting Up the Date List R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

“Defining Simulation Utility Data” on page 275). If these defaults

are acceptable for the current case, you can skip the next two steps.

The dates shown here are the default start and end dates of the
production data. It is not recommended that you change the Start
Date, however you may want to set the End Date much later than
the end date of your production data if you want to simulate a
production run that continues well into the future.

You can click on the date to retype it, or you can click the down
arrow icon ( ) to select from a calendar.

If the calendar appears, use the double arrow icons ( ) to

change the year and the single arrow icons ( ) to change the
month. Once the desired date appears, click to select it.

4. Set up the remaining fields on the dialog box according to

procedures in the table on page 282.

5. When finished setting up the date list options, click the OK button
to close this panel.The date list is generated automatically and
looks something like this:

R5000.0.1 Defining Output Options: Setting Up the Date List 281

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Setting the Date List Options

Option How To Use It
Print Options / Specify the PRINT options to be used and default frequency for the print options. PRINT
Frequency records will be generated for the simulation on the frequency specified. To see a list of all
available PRINT options, click the button to the right of the Print Options field. Major
categories are shown as folders, which you can open by clicking the (+) icon. Put a check
next to each option desired, then click OK to close the option list.
To select a default frequency for the PRINT options, set the Frequency value to the right of
the Print Options field.

Click to display option list Enter frequency of PRINT output

Click to
expand folders

Click to turn on
appropriate
checkboxes

Once selected, these options will be included as keywords in any data file that you generate
with the SimDataStudio™ software, until the next time you change them.
Note: You can use the MB3 Change Print Option option for cell to define multiple
reports, each with its own frequency. Refer to “Adding or Changing the Selected Options in
a Cell” on page 287.

282 Defining Output Options: Setting Up the Date List R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Setting the Date List Options (Continued)

Option How To Use It
Plot Options / Specify the PLOT options to be used and default frequency for the PLOT options. PLOT
Frequency records will be generated for the simulation on the frequency specified.
This works the same way as the PRINT options discussed above. The only difference is the
option list that you see:

Map Options/ Specify the MAPOUT options to be used and default frequency for the MAPOUT options.
Frequency MAPOUT records will be generated for the simulation on the frequency specified.
This works the same way as the PRINT options discussed earlier. The only difference is the
option list that you see:

R5000.0.1 Defining Output Options: Setting Up the Date List 283

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Setting the Date List Options (Continued)

Option How To Use It
Output Options Use this option to:
• Control the arrays that are printed for a cell or column. The array options dialog box opens
as shown below.:

Note: when this option is set, it is not used unless the Array option is active within the
corresponding Print command.
• Create special reports such as timestep summaries, well/perforation status changes,
convergence information, automatic workovers, recompletion unit status changes, and
condensate information. The Action Options dialog box opens as shown below.

This option lets you shift values by a constant factor and change average pore-volume
pressure from total to hydrocarbon only,

284 Defining Output Options: Setting Up the Date List R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Setting the Date List Options (Continued)

Option How To Use It
Spreadsheet Select the Change Spreadsheet File for Cell option on the right mouse button drop-down
Summary menu in any of the Spreadsheet Summary fields (Well, Gather, Flow Station, Area, Field
Options Region) to open the Spreadsheet Summary Options dialog box.

Use this dialog box to select the spreadsheet format and data.
Restart Options / Use the check box to indicate whether you want RESTART records to be written. When the
Frequency box is checked, a Frequency field displays so you can specify the frequency of the
RESTART records.

6. Use the procedures in the rest of this chapter to change the date
list, as needed to make it conform to your needs.

R5000.0.1 Defining Output Options: Setting Up the Date List 285

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Changing the Date List

Once you have generated a date list, there are various ways you can
change the Output Options worksheet, as explained on the following
pages.

Adding a Date Record

You can add a date into the list by adding an extra row to the
worksheet. Follow these steps:

1. Right-click on the date list at the point where you want to insert a
new date (i.e., on the row above where you want the date inserted).
You should see the following shortcut menu:

2. Select Add Date Card to view the following dialog box:

3. Type in the date you want to add to the list, or select it from the
pop-up calendar that appears when you click the down-arrow
button ( ).

4. Click the OK button. This adds an empty row to the chart. You will
now need to manually specify the options that apply in each
column of the Output Options worksheet, as explained next.

286 Defining Output Options: Changing the Date List R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Adding or Changing the Selected Options in a Cell

You can change the contents of any cell in the worksheet, or specify
options for an empty cell in a new date row. Follow these steps:

1. Right-click the cell to be changed, and then select the option

shown below on the resulting shortcut menu.

Option to select

For instance, if you right-click a cell in the Print Options column,

you will select Change Print Option for cell from the last
position on the shortcut menu.

Clicking on an Empty Row

You cannot do this on an empty row in the worksheet. The shortcut menu will
not provide the appropriate Change option if you click on an empty row.

Selecting the Change Print Option for Cell option displays the
Select Print Options dialog for the appropriate option type.

R5000.0.1 Defining Output Options: Changing the Date List 287

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

2. Click the Add Option button to add a new report. The Print Option
dialog box opens as shown below.

3. Open each of the folders by clicking the (+) icon.

4. Put a check next to each option desired, then click OK. The Select
Frequency dialog box opens as shown below.

Select the print frequency and click OK. You return to the Select
Print Option dialog box with all selected reports listed.

You can then click and highlight an individual report in the list to
delete it (Remove button), replace it (Modify button), or change
the frequency.

288 Defining Output Options: Changing the Date List R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Changing the Restart Dates

When you generate a list of dates in the Date Summary worksheet, the
Restart option is invoked (checked) based on the frequency that you
specified.

If desired, you can turn Restart on or off on any date in this worksheet.
To do this, click the check box until the check is on or off.

Changing the Output Frequency

The Nexus software supports situations where an individual output
statement can be terminated abruptly on a certain date, or applied
repetitively to future dates and timesteps. Use the following steps to
apply these special “frequency modifiers” to your existing output
statements in the Output Options worksheet:

1. Move your mouse cursor to the exact cell where you want to apply
a frequency modifier. For instance, you might want to apply a
frequency modifier to the fourth cell in the Print Options column.

2. Right-click the desired cell. You will see a shortcut menu as

follows:

R5000.0.1 Defining Output Options: Changing the Date List 289

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

3. Select Change Output Frequency from the shortcut menu. This

displays a special dialog box:

4. Select the appropriate option as follows:

Option What It Does

For date only Output option will be applied to this date only.
For all DATE or Output option will be applied to all subsequent dates
TIME cards in the date list, regardless of whether those are
specified using a DATE card or TIME card.
Switch Output Terminate the output option on the selected date in
Option off the date list (no repetition on future dates).
Activate Output If either of the first two selections are chosen, you
Option every X can specify a timestep frequency for output. For
timesteps example, if you want the output to be generated
every tenth timestep, check this box and set the
counter to 10.

5. Click OK to close this dialog box.

290 Defining Output Options: Changing the Date List R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Clearing the Worksheet

You can clear the Output Options worksheet and start over if desired.
Follow these steps:

1. Right-click in the worksheet area to see the following shortcut

menu:

2. Select Clear Grid Data from the shortcut menu. You will see this
message:

3. Click the Yes button to clear all data from the Date Summary
worksheet. Otherwise, click No.

R5000.0.1 Defining Output Options: Clearing the Worksheet 291

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

292 Defining Output Options: Clearing the Worksheet R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Working with Well Data

Introduction

This panel displays the list of wells as a worksheet and lets you set up
or modify the list of wells that will come online during the simulation,
including those that you chose to import from a Network Planner file.

You can:

• Create well lists from scratch

• Import a well list based on the .wij files produced in the

GRIDGENR™ software

• Review and edit the well list, and sort it in various ways

• Change the effective date that any well comes online

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Introduction 293

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

• Insert or delete wells in the well list

• Create well perforation lists from scratch

• Import and edit a well perforation list based on the .fpf files
produced in the GRIDGENR software. Or import well trajectory
and perforation data from the OpenWorks software, a .gtf file, or a
formatted text file, edit the perforations, and adjust them to the
simulation grid

• View and edit well constraints

• Define and edit the well management level data and define
production/injection target rates and ontime factors.

294 Working with Well Data: Introduction R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Viewing the Well Names and Locations Worksheet

To start generating a list of wells, you must first view the Well Names
and Locations worksheet. To do this, double-click the Wells Name and
Location option in the tree diagram to the left of the worksheet. The
worksheet display area should now appear as follows:

Double-click here Worksheet changes to well list display

This display lets you set up a list of wells that will come online during
the simulation, including:

Effective Date - the date on which the well becomes visible to the
simulation and begins producing or injecting as specific flow rates

Well Number - the number of the well

Well Name - the name of the well

I Location - the I direction gridblock coordinate of the well in the

simulation grid

J location - the J direction gridblock coordinate of the well in the

simulation grid

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Viewing the Well Names and Locations Worksheet 295
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Separator Battery Number- the number of the separate battery that

the well is attached to, if applicable.

Grid - the name of the local grid refinement file where the well is
located, if applicable. If local grid refinement is not used, this column
contains the word “ROOT” to indicate the well is located in the base
grid.

Description - an optional well description field.

296 Working with Well Data: Viewing the Well Names and Locations Worksheet R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Setting Up the Well List

Once you have opened the Well Names and Locations worksheet, you
can fill in the worksheet manually with well names, locations, and
effective dates. If you have already used the GRIDGENR software to
set up a simulation model, you can import data directly from the
resulting .wij file using the following procedure.

1. Right-click the worksheet area to see the following shortcut menu:

2. Select Import wij File to view the following dialog box:

Folder being
scanned

List of files
in this folder

File name
selected
for inclusion

3. If you do not see the desired file, use the Look in drop-down list to
locate the folder where the .wij file is stored.

When looking for a folder, you also have the following options:

• Click the drop-down list icon ( ) to see the current location

where the program is trying to find the file.
• Use the up-folder icon ( ) if you need to move up to a higher
folder level.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well List 297
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

• Double-click any folder icon ( ) shown in the file list if you

want to open it (i.e., move to a lower folder level).
• Click the new folder icon ( ) if you want to create a new
folder within the currently selected location. This adds a new
folder with the name “New Folder” to the file list. Type the
new folder name and press the Enter key.
• Use the Details icon ( ) if you want to see the size, type, and
modification date of the files shown in the file list.

4. Click the desired File name in the file list and click the Open
button.

This reads in data from the .wij file and fills in the worksheet with
the resulting data. For instance:

298 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Displaying Common Well IDs

The Common Well ID section panel lets you view cross-referenced

well names from the OpenWorks® software and how they translate for
use with the Nexus software. This information comes from the .wdb
file.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Displaying Common Well IDs 299
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Changing the Well List

Once you have set up the Well Names and Locations worksheet, you an
change it in various ways, as explained on the following pages.

Changing the Effective Date or Other Cells

The list of dates in the Effective Date column should correctly reflect
the dates on which the wells apply to the simulation. To change any
date, simply click on it and retype it. However, the date you specify
must be within the simulation time interval as specified in the Dates
Summary worksheet (see “Defining Output Options” on page 277).
You can also change any other cells in the worksheet by retyping.

Sorting the Worksheet

You can sort the list of wells based on any data type. For example, you
Click column
heading to may want to sort the list by Effective Date, Well Name, Well Number,
sort by that
data type
or any of the other column headings.

To sort the list based on a particular data type, click the appropriate
column heading for that data type. For instance, if you click the Well
Number column heading, the list will be resorted by Well Number.

Cutting, Copying and Pasting Cells

You can cut, copy, and paste cells to/from any column in the worksheet,
as long as you do not try to cut, copy, and paste information across
multiple columns. This is an easy way to remove a group of cells or
duplicate the contents of a group of cells at a different location on the
worksheet.

1. Click on the first cell to be copied or cut.

2. If you want to select a range of cells, control-click the cell at the

end of the range. This highlights all cells in between your first
click and your control-click. Remember that you can only cut or
copy a range of cells within a column, not across columns.

3. Select Edit > Cut to delete the selected cells or Edit > Copy to
copy them. Or you can press Ctrl-X to cut or Ctrl-C to copy.

300 Working with Well Data: Changing the Well List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

4. You can paste the selected cells by clicking on the top cell in the
area to be pasted, and then selecting Edit > Paste (or Ctrl-V).

The SimDataStudio™ software performs basic validation to make

sure the data remains consistent within the spreadsheet. If you try
to cut, copy, or paste inconsistent data types, it will display an
error message.

Inserting a New Well

Use the following steps if needed to insert a new well into the existing
worksheet.

1. Right-click the worksheet area to see the following shortcut menu:

2. Select Insert New Well to view the following dialog box:

3. Enter the well name, number, gridblock location (I/J), gathering

center number, separator battery, and grid type, as appropriate.
Notice that an appropriate well number is already proposed.

4. Click the OK button. The new well is added to the worksheet at

the appropriate place in the hierarchy (in well number sequence).

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Changing the Well List 301
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Deleting Individual Wells

You can delete individual wells from the worksheet by removing the
appropriate row from the worksheet. Follow these steps:

1. Right click on the row you want to delete, then select Delete Well
from the shortcut menu. This displays the following message:

2. Turn on the check box labeled Renumber Wells After Deleting if

you want all the Well Numbers in the worksheet to be renumbered
appropriately after deleting this one.

3. Click the OK button if this is the well you want to delete,

otherwise click Cancel to avoid deleting it.

If you click OK, the appropriate row is deleted from the

worksheet.

302 Working with Well Data: Changing the Well List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Deleting Multiple Wells

You can delete multiple wells from the worksheet by selecting them
from a special list. Follow these steps:

1. Right click on any cell in the worksheet, then select Delete Wells
from the shortcut menu. This displays the following dialog box:

2. Turn on the check box labeled Renumber Wells After Deleting if

you want all the Well Numbers in the worksheet to be renumbered
appropriately after deleting these wells.

3. Hold down the Control key and click on all the wells you want to
delete. Use the scrollbar to see the entire list.

4. Make sure all wells to be deleted are highlighted, then click the
OK button to delete them (or click Cancel if you change your
mind and do not want to delete any wells).

If you click OK, the appropriate rows are deleted from the
worksheet.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Changing the Well List 303
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Clearing the Worksheet

You can clear the worksheet and start over if desired. Follow these
steps:

1. Right-click the worksheet area to see the following shortcut menu:

2. Select Clear Grid Data from the shortcut menu. You will see this
message:

3. Click the Yes button to clear all data from the worksheet.
Otherwise, click No.

304 Working with Well Data: Clearing the Worksheet R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Viewing the Perforations Worksheet

To begin generating a list of well perforations, you must open the Well
Perforations worksheet. To do this, double-click the Well Perforations
option in the tree diagram to the left of the worksheet. The worksheet
display area should now appear as follows:

This display lets you set up a list of well perforations that will come
online during the simulation, including the following data:

Effective Date - the date on which the perforation becomes effective

during the simulation.

Well - the name of the well in which the perforation is located.

Layer No. - the vertical simulation grid layer in which the perforation
is located.

I/J location - the simulation gridblock coordinates of the well

perforation.

Grid Name - the name of the local grid refinement file where the well
is located, if applicable. Default is “root” (i.e., no LGR file).

These are the standard data fields typically found in perforation data.
However, many more fields may be available, depending on the source
of the data.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Viewing the Perforations Worksheet 305
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Setting Up the Well Perforation List

Once you have opened the Well Perforations worksheet, you can fill it
in manually with perforation data and effective dates. If you have
already used the GRIDGENR software to set up a simulation model,
you can import data directly from the resulting .fpf file using the
following procedure. Otherwise, you can import an ASCII text file
which meets the following specification.

Specifications for ASCII Import for Well Perforation Data

• The file must be formatted into columns.

• A standard delimiter (tab, spaces, commas) must be used to delineate
each column.
• The top row may contain valid keywords to define the data in the column.
If so, the Import Wizard will translate the data. If no valid keyword is
found on the top of the columns, you will have to define the data using
the Import Wizard.
• One column must be the well name.
• Only columns that match Nexus® perforation options can be imported.

1. Right-click the worksheet to see the following shortcut menu:

306 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

2. Select Import fpf File to view the following dialog box:

Folder being
scanned

List of files
in this folder

File name
selected
for import

3. The default lists only the fpf files. If you are importing from
another ASCII file format, click the Files of Type pull-down menu
and select All Files.

4. If you do not see the desired file, use the Look in drop-down list to
locate the folder where the .fpf file is stored.

When looking for a folder, you also have the following options:

• Click the drop-down list icon ( ) to see the current location

where the program is trying to find the file.
• Use the up-folder icon ( ) if you need to move up to a higher
folder level.
• Double-click any folder icon ( ) shown in the file list if you
want to open it (i.e., move to a lower folder level).
• Click the new folder icon ( ) if you want to create a new
folder within the currently selected location. This adds a new
folder with the name “New Folder” to the file list. Type the
new folder name and press the Enter key.
• Use the Details icon ( ) if you want to see the size, type, and
modification date of the files shown in the file list.

5. Click the desired File name in the file list and click the Open
button.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List 307
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Importing from an FPF File

When you click the Open button after selecting an fpf file, the data
is read from the .fpf file and fills in the worksheet with the
resulting data. For instance:

308 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Importing using the Perforation Wizard

The Perforation Wizard allows you to edit perforation data directly
within the SimDataStudio software. You can also load markers to
adjust geological layers and faults to the simulation grid. Refer to the
illustration below.

The OpenWorks software GRIDGENR .gtf File Formatted Text File

(from Wellbore Planner, (to modify outside of the (generic format compatible with Wellbore
field data, etc.) GRIDGENR software) Planner and other products)

Simulation Grid

Perforation Wizard

Map Geological Layers/Faults to Simulation Grid

(Text Marker File Only)
VIP Format
Perforations VDB

Perforate/Plug
Add/Delete Perforations
Change Length

Geological Layers/Faults
Mapped to Simulation Grid
Modified Perforations

The Perforation Wizard lets you load well trajectory and perforation
data from:

• An ASCII text file (formatted as described in the next section).

The format is similar to those output by most applications,
including Wellbore Planner.

• A GRIDGENR™ (.gtf) file. This format is described in the

GridGenr User’s Guide (“Importing and Exporting Files” section
of the “Getting Started” chapter).

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List 309
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

• The OpenWorks software..

Note: Order-dependent Imports

It is highly recommended that you import data in order (i.e., traces before
perforations and perforations before markers.

The perforation wizard guides you through the steps necessary to load
the file as described below.

1. Open the wizard. Click the wizard icon on the toolbar.

2. Select the grid from the VDB. The grid definition wizard is panel
shown below.

Click the folder icon to open the File Selection dialog box.
Select the database (.vdb) file which contains the grid definition. If
multiple cases exist for the study, click the icon and select the
case. Then click the Next Button.

310 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

3. Select the text and/or .gtf well file(s). The well file definition
wizard is panel shown below.

Fields available only if you

have OpenWorks

Use the buttons shown below to select the file(s) to import.

Create new file import line

Delete selected file from import list
Move up import list
Move down import list

Open File Selection dialog box

File types

Use the Files of Type menu on the File Selection dialog box to filter the
available .txt or .gtf files.

Select the date format from the drop-down menu. Click the toggle
to define whether the units are in field or metric.

Importing OpenWorks Perforation Data

If you are importing data from the OpenWorks software, activate the Import
Well Data from Openworks toggle. Then click the button and select the
OpenWorks project, wells to import, and interpreter.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List 311
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Then click the Next Button. If you imported a well trajectory file
with markers, the marker mapping panel opens as described in the
next step. If you did not import markers, proceed to step 5.

4. Map markers. If you imported perforation and/or fault markers,

the marker/simulation layer relations panel opens as shown below.

Click in Marker
Type field to Click in
open marker Simulation
type drop-down Layer field to
menu. activate
simulation
layer selection
stepper

Import existing
marker file.

Save defined
connections
as marker file.

This panel lets you assign markers for geological layers or faults to
the top or bottom of a simulation layer in order to adjust for
discrepancies between the simulation grid and the structural
layers. The simulator will then compute the location of the
perforation in terms of the gridblock. This can improve the
accuracy of the simulation, especially in highly dipping areas
where the gridblock is too coarse to track the structure.

Well Trace Correction from top of structure

to top of simulation gridblock

Geometric intersection default

Correction to ”true layer”

For each imported marker ID, select the marker type and use the
stepper to map it to the appropriate simulation layer. Options are to

312 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

ignore the marker, map it to the top or bottom of the selected

simulation layer, or identify it as a fault.

Saving and loading marker map files

Once defined, you can save the marker map to a file for repeated use.

Then click the Next Button. The marker locations are recalculated.

5. Review/adjust perforations. The review/adjust perforations panel

opens as shown below.

Error report

Open
Perforation well/time perforations
selection menus in the
3DVIEW
software

Print

Sort by perforation
length cutoff

If you did not map markers, the panel displays as shown above. If
you mapped markers, the corrected perforations are color-coded,
by default green for corrected depths and orange for deleted
perforations.

Error Reporting

Note the message “Simulation Grid Perforations could not be calculated for some
perforation intervals”. The program ignores intervals where well trace did not
intersect the reservoir. Click the View Intervals button to open a listing of
ignored intervals.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List 313
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Column definitions are:

Column Header Description

Well Well name
Date Effective Date
Status (Editable) Whether the perforation is active (Perf) or plugged
(Plug)
MD1 (or TVD) Measured or true vertical depth at the top of the
perforation
MD2 (or TVD) Measured or true depth at the bottom of the perforation
Calculated by the Program
IW x(r) direction gridblock index of the block containing
the perforation
JW y(theta) direction gridblock index of the block
containing the perforation
Layer Simulation layer of the perforation
Length (Editable) Length of the perforation
ANGLA Angle (in degrees) of the well segment with respect to
the x axis in the areal plane.
ANGLV Angle (in degrees) of the well segment with respect to
the x axis in the areal plane.
PWDEP Depth to middle of perforation segment

You can do the following on this panel:

View the Click the button to open the 3DVIEW™ software

perforations and view the perforations.
Find perforation Enter the cut-off value in the field shown below. This
cut-off length activates the Apply Cut-off button. When you click the
button, all perforations less than specified length
highlight (default red) for easy identification.

Cut-off

Perforate or plug Click the Perf/Plug toggle to edit the status of a

perforation.
Change Click in the Length field and edit the perforation length.
perforation length

314 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Add/delete Click in the row below which to add a perforation or in

perforations the row you want to delete. Select the Add or Delete
option from the right mouse button menu as shown
below.

If you selected to add a perforation, complete the

information in the dialog box and click OK.

The perforation is added.

Click the Next button when you are ready to export the
perforations.

6. Export the perforations. The export panels opens as shown below.

Activate the first option to export the well definition and

perforation files to the VDB. Activate the second option to import
them into your current SimDataStudio session as well.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List 315
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

If you have perforations less than the specified cut-off value, click
the toggle to remove them or set their status to off. The default is
to keep them.

Click the Finish button to perform the import/export and close the
Wizard.

316 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

ASCII file format to import Well Perf Data

Three formats are defined: the well trace, well perforations, and well
markers.

Well Trace File

The format for the well trace file is:

WELL [BORE] X Y Z [MD]

name1 [bore1] X1,1,1 Y1,1,1 Z1,1,1 [MD]1,1,1

…
name1 [bore k] Xi,1,k Yi,1,k Zi,1,k [MD]i,1,k

…
namen [bore p] Xi,n.p Yi,n,p Zi,n,p [MD]i,n,p

where:

namen
Name for the nth well entered.
Borep
Bore number for the nth well entered. If no bore
information is entered, bore 1 is assumed.
Xi,n,p
X coordinate of the ith trajectory point entered for
pth bore of nth well.
Yi,n,p
Y coordinate of the ith trajectory point entered for
pth bore of nth well.
Zi,n,p
Z coordinate of the ith trajectory point entered for pth
bore of nth well.
MDi,n,p
Measured depth of the ith trajectory point entered for
pth bore of nth well. If no measured depth is entered,
it will be interpolated from the trajectory segments.

Example:

WELL X Y Z MD
W1 6100 5000 0.00 0.00
W1 6000 5000 4812.50 4813.54
W1 5750 5000 4860.08 5068.03

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List 317
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

W1 5500 5000 4910.26 5323.01

W2 5600 5200 0.00 0.00
W2 5700 5100 4932.24 5013.62

Well Perforation Events

Two alternate formats for the well perforation events file are:

WELL [BORE] DATE EVENT MDTOP [MDBOT]

name1 [bore1] date,1,1 event1,1,1 MDT1,1,1 [MDB]1,1,1

…
name1 [bore k] datei,1,k eventi,1,k MDTi,1,k [MDB]i,1,k

…
namen [bore p] datei,n.p eventi,n,p MDTi,n,p [MDB]i,n,p

or:

DATE WELL [BORE] EVENT MDTOP [MDBOT]

date,1,l,1 name1 [bore1] event1,1,1 MDT1,1,1 [MDB]1,1,1

…
datei,1,k name1 [bore k] eventi,1,k MDTi,1,k [MDB]i,1,k

…
datei,n.p namen [bore p] eventi,n,p MDTi,n,p [MDB]i,n,p

where:

namen
Name for the nth well entered.
Borep
Bore number for the nth well entered. If no bore
information is entered, bore 1 is assumed.
datei,n,p
Date of ith perforation event for pth bore of nth well.
Event must be given in historical order i.e.
datei+1,n,p >= datei,n,p. Format for the date must be
specified on the UI, most common date format sup-
ported.
eventi,n,p
ith event for pth bore of nth well. Event can be either
PERF or PLUG. For a PLUG event, the interval
must have had a PERF event at a previous date.

318 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

MDTOPi,n,p
Measured depth of the top of the ith perf interval for
pth bore of nth well.
MDBOTi,n,p
Measured depth of the bottom of the ith perf interval
for pth bore of nth well. If no bottom depth is given,
a bottom depth of a previous defined perf interval
will be assigned if any. If none perf interval will be
assumed all the way to the end of the reservoir.

Examples:

WELL DATE EVENT MDTOP MDBOT

W1 01/01/1998 PERF 5835.51 6249.06
W1 01/05/1998 PLUG 6035.51
W1 01/10/1998 PERF 6666.98 7090.54
W2 01/01/1998 PERF 4932.23 5324.19

At 01/05/1998, the only active perforation for well W1 will be from

MD=5835.51 to MD=6035.5:1

DATE WELL EVENT MDTOP MDBOT

01/01/1998 W1 PERF 5835.51 6249.06
01/01/1998 W2 PERF 4932.23 5324.19
01/05/1998 W1 PLUG 6035.51
01/10/1998 W2 PERF 5122.02 5201.54

Wells Marker File

The format for the well marker file is:

WELL [BORE] MD PICK

name1 [bore1] MD1,1,1 pick1,1,1

…
name1 [bore k] MDi,1,k picki,1,k

…
namen [bore p] MDi,n,p picki,n,p

where:

namen
Name for the nth well entered.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List 319
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Borep
Bore number for the nth well entered. If no bore
information is entered, bore 1 is assumed.
MDi,n,p
Measured depth of the ith marker entered for pth
bore of nth well.
picki,n,p
Surface name corresponding to the ith marker
entered for pth bore of nth well.

Example:

WELL MD PICK
W1 5835.51 Perf1
W1 6249.06 Fault1
W1 6666.98 Perf2

Notes

• Perforation Events and Markers can be specified in the same file

than the Traces or in separate files.

• Markers are optional, if no marker is entered, no correction will be

generated (i.e. perforation calculation will be done the same way
as in the GRIDGENR software).

• Measured depths should be entered wherever available.

• For true vertical wells, to define a trace only one record per well
with a name, X and Y location might be specified. Header cards
needed will be reduced to (WELL X Y).

• For true vertical wells, true vertical depth can be entered for
Perforation Events. Use TVDTOP/TVDBOT header instead of
MDTOP/MDBOT. For Markers use TVD header instead of MD.

• Comma, tab or space separator can be used. Well names with

blank spaces must be double quoted. Non-compatible well names
will be converted to Nexus well names.

• For input file names, gtf extension is reserved for back-

compatibility with the GRIDGENR software.

• Comments can be added to the data files (“C” at beginning of line

of after “!” at the end of a data line).

320 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Importing from an ASCII File

Perforation data can be imported from a tabular column ASCII file
format (with either tabs, commas, or blanks as delimiters). One column
must be the well name and only valid Nexus perforation options can be
imported. If you import data from an ASCII file, the Import Wizard
will display the number of columns that could be delineated.

You can click the toggles to change the number of columns or the
delimiter that the program should recognize. Click the Next button
when the format is correct. The Import Wizard proceeds to the next
dialog box. If you titled each column with a valid keyword, the data
type should appear correctly as shown below.

Click to open pop-up menu to

select data type

Pop-up menu

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List 321
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

If a keyword was not included or could not be read, click in the header
row and select the data type from the pop-up menu. Click Ignore Data
for any column you do not wish to import.

When all columns have been defined or ignored, the Finish button
becomes active. Click Finish to load the data. The keywords for which
data is loaded displays in the message area.

The perforations then open in the spreadsheet.

Perforation Data Import Results

Perforation data files can be fairly complex. When the program loads a
.fpf file, it shows all the data it was able to find. Some of the standard
perforation data columns may be blank if the data was not available in
the file.

If the .fpf file does not contain any date information, the Effective Date
for each perforation record defaults to the simulation start date. If you
want the perforation to come online later in the simulation, you will
need to change the Effective Date appropriately.

If the .fpf file does contain date information for the perfs, they will
show in the Effective Date column. If there are sets of perforations

322 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

defined before the simulation start date, for each well only the more
recent one will be kept and its Effective Date will be set to the
simulation start date.

Important: because of Nexus perforation format, if a well has sets of

perforations defined at different dates, all the perforations active at a
date have to be defined at that same date:

For example if well N1 has a perforation in layer 1 from date 1 1 1995

and another perforation in layer 2 from date 1 2 1995, 3 entries must be
present for the well in the Perf View as shown, one for perforation in
layer 1 at 1 1 1995 and two for perforations in layer 1 and 2 at 1 2 1995.

If only perforation in layer 2 was present, it would cause the Nexus

software to have only perforation (the one in layer 2) active after 1 2
1995.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Setting Up the Well Perforation List 323
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Changing the Perforation List

Once you have set up well perforation data in the worksheet, you can
change the data in various ways, as explained on the following pages.

Changing the Effective Date or Other Data

The list of dates in the Effective Date column should correctly reflect
the dates on which the perforations apply to the simulation. To change
any date, simply click on it and retype it. However, the date you specify
must be within the simulation time interval as specified in the Dates
Summary worksheet (see “Defining Output Options” on page 277).
You can also change any other cells in the worksheet by retyping.

Sorting the Worksheet

You can sort the list of perforations based on any data type. For
Click column
heading to example, you may want to sort the list by Effective Date, Well Name,
sort by that
data type
or any of the other column headings.

To sort the list based on a particular data type, click the appropriate
column heading for that data type. For instance, if you click the Well
Number column heading, the list will be resorted by Well Number.

Cutting, Copying and Pasting Cells

You can cut, copy, and paste cells in the worksheet as a quick way to
remove or duplicate individual cell entries or a range of cells. For
details, see “Cutting, Copying and Pasting Cells” on page 300.

324 Working with Well Data: Changing the Perforation List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Adding or Removing Columns in the Worksheet

When you first opened the perforation list and imported data, certain
columns were listed in the worksheet area. The columns displayed in
this worksheet are controlled by a special list, that you can use to add or
remove columns. Follow these steps:

1. Right-click anywhere in the worksheet and select Perforation

Options from the shortcut menu.This displays the Perforation
Options list.

2. Notice the folders tagged with a red mark. These contain data
types already shown in the worksheet. You can open any folder by
clicking the (+) sign to the left of it. When you open a red-tagged
folder, the selected data fields are indicated by a check in the check
box next to the data field name.

3. Review all the data types and turn check boxes on or off,
depending on how you want the worksheet to be organized.

4. Click the OK button to close this list.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Changing the Perforation List 325
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Inserting a New Perforation Record

Use the following steps, if needed, to insert a new perforation record
into the existing worksheet.

1. Right-click the worksheet to see the following shortcut menu:

2. Select Add Wells Perforations to view the following dialog box:

3. Specify an Effective Date for the perforation by typing it in or

selecting it from the drop-down list.

4. Use the scrollable list on the right to select the well being
perforated.

5. Indicate the range of layers that the perforation covers in the

Perforated From Layer and To Layer fields. You can type in a
number or use the scroll arrows to select it.

6. Click the OK button. The new perforation is added to the list at an

appropriate place in the hierarchy (in well number sequence).

326 Working with Well Data: Changing the Perforation List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

7. If the well duplicates an existing perforation, you may see the

following message. Answer Yes if you want to overwrite the
existing definition. Otherwise, answer No.

Adding a Perforation to an Existing Well

Use the following steps, if needed, to insert a new perforation record
into the existing worksheet.

1. In the worksheet, locate the well that you want to add a perforation
to. Right-click on the well to see the following shortcut menu:

2. Select Insert Perforation for Well XX to view the following

dialog box:

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Changing the Perforation List 327
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

3. Enter the Layer Number of the simulation grid layer in which the
well will be perforated, or enter the Depth to Top and Depth to
Bottom of the perforation interval, in the units requested.

4. Click the OK button when finished.

Deleting Well Perforation Records

You can delete individual perforation records from the worksheet or
delete all perforations on a well-by-well basis. Follow these steps:

1. To remove a single record, right-click on it and select Delete

Perforation for Well NN from the shortcut menu. The row is
deleted automatically from the worksheet.

2. To remove multiple perforations on a well-by-well basis, right-

click anywhere in the worksheet, then select Delete Wells
Perforations from the shortcut menu. This displays the following
dialog box:

3. Hold down the Control key and click on all the wells you want to
delete. Use the scrollbar to see the entire list.

4. Make sure all wells to be deleted are highlighted, then click the
OK button to delete them (or click Cancel if you change your
mind and do not want to delete any wells).

If you click OK, all the rows are deleted from the worksheet that
contain the selected wells.

328 Working with Well Data: Changing the Perforation List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Deleting Layer Perforations

You can delete specific layer perforation records from the worksheet or
delete all perforations on a layer-by-layer basis. Follow these steps:

1. To remove multiple perforations on a layer-by-layer basis, right-

click anywhere in the worksheet, then select Delete Layer
Perforations from the shortcut menu. This displays the following
dialog box:

Stepper Buttons
Increase Number
Decrease Number

2. Use the Scroll Arrows to increment or decrement the first and last
(inclusive) layer of perforations to remove.

3. Click the OK button to delete them (or click Cancel if you change
your mind and do not want to delete any perforations).

If you click OK, all the perforations are deleted from the
worksheet that contains the selected layers.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Changing the Perforation List 329
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Clearing the Worksheet

You can clear the Well Perforations worksheet and start over if desired.
Follow these steps:

1. Right-click the worksheet to see the following shortcut menu:

2. Select Clear Grid Data from the shortcut menu. You will see this
message:

3. Click the Yes button to clear all data from the worksheet.
Otherwise, click No.

330 Working with Well Data: Changing the Perforation List R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Defining Recompletion Units

This option is not yet valid for the SimDataStudio software.

Recompletion units can be defined using the Procedures option. Refer
to the “Procedures” chapter of the Nexus Keyword Document.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Defining Recompletion Units 331

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Viewing/Editing Well Constraints

The Wells Constraints worksheet helps you to define and review

specific constraints for specific wells over time. This worksheet should
be filled in automatically when you generate the Data File. However,
you can also use it anytime to add or edit well constraints.

To use the worksheet, double-click the Wells Constraint option in the

tree diagram to the left of the worksheet. The worksheet display area
should now appear as follows:

Double-click here Worksheet changes to well constraints display

The dates are those generated on the Dates Summary worksheet. The
wells are those generated on the Well Names and Locations worksheet.

332 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Well Type Color Code

You can set the color for each type of well. Once set, each row of data
in the worksheet will display in the selected color. Click to activate the
Disable Well Type Color Code toggle when you do not want the
color-coded worksheet display.

Click to open Color Palette

Activate toggle to disable color coding in worksheet

View Mode Selection

You can view the worksheet by well or by constraint. The selection
menus at the bottom of the panel reflect your View Mode Selection
option.

In By Constraint mode, you can select constraints from a pull-down

menu for all well types, all or selected producers, or all or selected
injectors. In Well mode, you can work from a list of constraint columns
for individual wells.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints 333

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Setting Constraints
A definition for each type of constraint is provided. Procedures for
setting constraints are then detailed.

Definitions
Constraints are defined as summarized in the table below

Constraint Description Nexus Keyword VIP®

Keyword

Well Type Switch between producer, injector, STREAMS column INJ,

or water-alternating gas. on well table PROD,
WAG
Nexus Well Well table
Specification
Maximum Rate The maximum rate a well is allowed Q*MX on QMAX
to produce/inject. constraint table
Water Limit The maximum water cut, water rate, WCUTMAX, WLIMIT
or gas ratio for a production well. WCUTPLUG or
QWSMX on
constraint table
Gas Limit The maximum gas-oil ratio or gas GOR/LGRMAX, GLIMIT
rate for a production well. GOR/LGRPLUG
or QGSMX on
constraint table
Well Economic The units being used for minimum Q*MN on ECOLIM
Limit well rate data. constraint table
Fraction On-Time The fraction of time a well is ONTIME column ONTIME
actually producing/injecting. on well table
Fraction is applied to the well rate
after the rate has been determined by
the Maximum Rate value or
pressure constraints
Gas Injector The composition of the injected gas STREAM table YINJ
Composition for injection wells using the STD or entry that get
RES options and not identified as assigned to well on
MI wells (with MI plant in the major well table
gas sales option). STREAMS column
Well Index The well indices for wells. WI column WI
WELLSPEC data

334 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

KH Multiplier KH column on
WELLSPEC data
Reference Depth The depth to which the flowing and DATUM column WLWDA
limiting bottomhole pressures are on well table T
referenced.
Bottomhole The limiting bottomhole pressure (a PMIN/MAX for BHP
Pressure productivity/injectivity index must well bh node on
be defined). CONSTRAINT
table
Tubinghead The limiting tubinghead pressure PMIN/MAX for THP
Pressure (Gas Producer THP tables must be well wh node on
defined. See below). CONSTRAINT
table
Drawdown Limit DPBHAVG on DPBHMX
CONSTRAINT
table if the average
drawdown/buildup
is specified.
DPBHMX if
maximum
drawdown/buildup
constraint is
specified.
Hydraulic Table Relates tubinghead pressure to METHOD column ITUBE
Assignment bottomhole pressure. Must be on NODECON
defined if tubinghead pressure limits table for well
are defined for a multi-phase connection
producer.
Artificial Lift ALQ on constraint ALQ
Quantity table
Gas Producer Number of the gas producer THP GTHPWL
THP Tables table that defines the z-factors and
Assignment viscosities in the wellbore for this
well.
Tubing Length Used in conjunction with tubing LENGTH column TUBE
diameter data to relate tubinghead on NODECON
pressure to bottomhole pressure. table for well
connection

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints 335

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Tubing Diameter/ Used in conjunction with tubing DIAM column on DIAM

Friction Factor length to relate tubinghead pressure NODECON table
to bottomhole pressure. for well connection
Perforation GOR, GORPERF +
WCUT and/or WCUTPERF on
SOR limit constraint table
Separator NEWSEP
Switching
Well Crossflow Select crossflow computations by CROSSFLOW/ XFON,
Calculations well. Modine, Coats, and Wells CROSS_SHUT XFOFF
method is used. columns on wells
table
Injection Water Water salinity of the injection well. entry on
Salinity STREAM_TRACE
R table that get
assigned to well on
STREAMS column
of WELL table

Procedures
You must specify the type of well and type of constraint for each
production or injection unit to be brought online during the simulation.
For instance, you might specify that well N4 is a gas producer at the
beginning of the simulation, and then change it to a water producer at a
later date in the simulation.

Perform the following steps to set a constraint:

1. Right-click the selected cell and select the constraint option from
from the pull-down menu as shown below. Or double-click with
the left mouse button.

This displays a dialog box you can use to define the constraint
parameters.

2. Complete the dialog box and click OK.

336 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Each constraint dialog box is summarized below. Recall that the

constraints definition table on the previous page lists each associated
keyword.

Well Type

The Well Type dialog box is shown below.

Use the radio buttons to define the well as a producer, injector, or water
alternating gas. Then define the following based on the well type you
specified.

Well Type Parameters

Producer Specify fluid type and unit for rate constraint
specification.
Injector Specify fluid type and unit for rate constraint
specification. If you select Fraction of Surface
Injection Rate or Fraction of Reservoir Fluid
Withdraw, then specify the hierarchy level.
If you specified a gas injector, you can activate key
component reinjection or the miscible option.
Water Alternating Specify unit for rate constraint specification and
Gas hierarchy level. You can activate key component
reinjection or the miscible option.
Define WAG cycle (number of cycles, cumulative
injection per cycle, and after-WAG conversion).

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints 337

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Flow Rate Constraint

Now that you have specified the type of constraint, you can specify the
actual flow rate or pressure from the dialog box as shown below.

Enter the desired maximum flow rates to be applied to the selected well
on the selected date. If this is a producing well for which you selected
Specify each Fluid Phase within the Well Type dialog box, then this
dialog box provides entry fields for each fluid. If you selected a water
alternating gas well type within the Well Type dialog box, then this
dialog box provides entry fields for water and gas.

Water Limit
You can specify a water limit for any given well on any available
effective date from the dialog box as shown below.

Click the toggle to select the limit option. Then enter the Water cut
limit value.

338 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Gas Limit
You can specify a gas limit for any given well on any available
effective date from the dialog box as shown below.

Click the toggle to select the limit option. Then enter the Gas/oil ratio
limit value.

Well Economic Limit

You can change an economic limit for any given well from the dialog
box as shown below.

Click the toggle to select minimum oil, gas, water, or liquid option.
Then enter the Rate Value.

Fraction On-Time
You can specify a fraction on-time for any given well from the dialog
box as shown below.

Enter the fraction value.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints 339

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Gas Injector Composition

If you have a compositional model, you can constrain a gas injector
well so that the injected gas stream contains a specified component
mole fraction from the dialog box as shown below.

Each component you defined under the Fluid Model tab of the Basic
Utilities panel displays in the dialog box. Click in the corresponding
Mole Fraction entry field and enter the value. Values must sum to 1.0.

Well Index
You can specify a well index for any given well from the dialog box as
shown below

Click the toggle to select the index format. The dialog box expands to
display the Well Index Data topic block. The data fields vary depending
on the format you selected:

• If you selected to define the well index directly, enter the Well
Index.

• If you selected to define productivity/injectivity, enter the

geometric factor and the productivity/injectivity.

340 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

• If you selected radial flow equation, enter the wellbore radius,

equivalent radius, and skin factor.

Reference Depth
You can specify the depth to which the flowing and limiting bottomhole
pressures are referenced from the dialog box as shown below.

Click in the entry field and enter the depth value.

Bottomhole Pressure
You can specify a bottomhole pressure constraint for any given well on
any available effective date from the dialog box as shown below.

Enter the desired maximum bottomhole pressure. Enter either the

referenced depth at which this pressure will be applied or click the
toggle to specify gridblock center with the first perforation.

Tubinghead Pressure
You can specify a tubinghead pressure constraint for any given well on
any available effective date from the dialog box as shown below.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints 341

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Enter the pressure value.

Hydraulic Tables Assignment

You can assign hydraulic tables to relate tubinghead pressure to
bottomhole pressure. Hydraulic tables are mandatory if tubinghead
pressure limits are defined for a multi-phase producer. It is optional for
single-phase (water and gas) injectors and gas producers. Define
hydraulic tables from the dialog box as shown below.

Use the stepper to select the bottomhole pressure table number that will
define tubing pressure losses for this well. Then enter the following:

• Vertical distance from the wellhead to the first set of perforations.

• Well datum depth. Bottomhole pressure is returned to this depth. If

not entered, datum depth defaults to the DEPTH from the first
IEQUIL card. A value of zero causes datum depth to be set to the
depth to the center of the gridblock containing the first perforation.

Activate the Turn Off Tubing Calculations for Well toggle to

deactivate the calculations without removing the data.

Datum Depth

The bottomhole pressure printed in well reports is referenced to this depth, which
must be measured from the same reference point as used for gridblock depths

342 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Gas Producers THP Tables Assignment

You can assign a THP table to a gas producer in order to define the z-
factors and viscosities in the wellbore from the dialog box as shown
below.

Enter the number of the gas producer THP table that defines the Z-
factors and viscosities in the wellbore for this well.

Tubing Length
You can define the tubing length that, in conjunction with tubing
diameter data, relates tubinghead pressure to bottomhole pressure from
the dialog box as shown below.

Enter the following:

• Effective tubing length, including the equivalent tubing length of

any downhole equipment.

• Vertical distance from the wellhead to the first set of perforations.

• Well datum depth. Bottomhole pressure is returned to this depth. If

not entered, datum depth defaults to the DEPTH from the first
IEQUIL card. A value of zero causes datum depth to be set to the
depth to the center of the gridblock containing the first perforation.

Datum Depth

The bottomhole pressure printed in well reports is referenced to this depth, which
must be measured from the same reference point as used for gridblock depths

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints 343

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Tubing Diameter/Friction Factor

You can define the tubing diameter data that, in conjunction with tubing
length, relates tubinghead pressure to bottomhole pressure from the
dialog box as shown below.

Enter the inside diameter of the tubing and the tubing roughness factor.

Friction Factor Calculation

Friction factors are calculated by the Jain equation.

Well Crossflow Calculations

Well crossflow calculations (Modine, Coats, and Wells method) can be
toggled on or off from the dialog box shown below.

Click to activate or deactivate the calculation for this well.

Minimum Rate for Targeting Calculations

You can specify the minimum rate to which well rate is cut back when a
phase target is being satisfied at any well management level.

344 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Click the button beside the phase to select and enter the corresponding
minimum value.

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Viewing/Editing Well Constraints 345

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Global Options

The options on this panel let you specify the default:

• Time intervals between tests - when connections which have been

shut in can be tested for reopening.

• Time intervals between tests for target and procedure shut-ins

• Injector mobility treatment options

These global options can be overridden for individual wells using the
Well Constraint panel. (Restriction: you can not yet override the
default injector mobility treatment method.) Perform the following
steps to specify global controls:

1. Select the date. Click on a date in the Date/Time card column on

the right of the panel. This is the date from which the default
global controls will be active.

2. Specify the time interval between tests. Click the ellipse button
and specify the following from the Time Interval Between Tests
dialog box.

• Select test time interval. Click the toggles to select the types
of shut-in for which you want to define the test interval.
Once a selection is made, click the ellipse button to open
a dialog box to define the test interval based on number of
time steps, number of days, changes in constraints or
network, number of shut-ins, or number or re-openings. Test
interval options are:

• Hydraulics table instability: Specifies that connections

which have been shut in due to flow in the unstable region of
the hydraulics tables, or due to no intersection between the
inflow and the hydraulics table, will be tested for ability to
flow.

Zero backflow constraints or pressure: Specifies that

connections which have been shut in due to zero backflow
constraints or pressure will be tested for ability to flow.

Minimum rate constraint: Specifies that connections which

have been shut in due to minimum rate constraints will be
tested for ability to flow.

346 Working with Well Data: Global Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

• Hydraulics instability, backflow, or qmin: All connections

which have been shut in will be tested using the same
interval definition.

3. Define test time for target and procedure shut-ins. The Test Time
for Target Shut-ins table lets you define test intervals for
connections which have been shut in by targeting (Refer to
“Targeting Options” on page 180). Then you select the target to
which it applies.

Click the Add a Line button as shown below to open a new line in
the table. (Notice also the other table management buttons.) Then
click in the field where the new line would be to activate the ellipse
button.

Once a selection is made, click the ellipse button to open a

dialog box to define the test interval based on number of time
steps, number of days, changes in constraints or network, number
of shut-ins, or number or re-openings.

The Test Time for Procedure Shut-ins table lets you define test
intervals for connections which have been shut in by the
CONSTRAINT procedure with a SHUTIN argument (see the
“Procedures” chapter of the Nexus Keyword Document). You
define the test interval using the same criteria defined above. Then
you select the shut-ins for which it applies.

4. Specify injector mobility treatment. Click the toggle to activate the

default mobility treatment:

• Endpoint mobility -- water or gas endpoint relative permeability of

the injected phase will be used to calculate the mobility.

• Total gridblock mobility -- the sum of the mobility of all fluids in

the grid block will be used. This is the default.

• Endpoint mobility (ECLIPSE™ method) -- the endpoint relative

permeability of the injected phase will be used to calculate the

R5000.0.1 Working with Well Data: Global Options 347

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

mobility. ECLIPSE uses the endpoint relative per me abilities even

when Sw is greater than Swro.

348 Working with Well Data: Global Options R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Surface and Interconnect Network

Introduction

These panels display as the Surface Network when a single-reservoir

model is active. They display as the Interconnect Network when a
multi-reservoir model is active.

These options let you define the connections, and controls, as well as
other information pertaining to the network. When applicable, network
values override those set for individual wells.

Well Planner Data: If you activated the following option on the New
SimDataStudio Case dialog box, this panel is populated with network
data created in Network Planner.

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: Introduction 349

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Define Network Nodes

This panel displays the network and any node pressures and
temperatures that you define or import as shown below. (The surface
network includes only node links and connections, not the reservoirs.)
The right-mouse button pop-up menu within the Nodes column lets
you connect the wells from the individual reservoirs to the interconnect
network.

Define/Import Network Nodes

Standard display conventions are described below:

Convention Description

Network Tree At each network level, click the open or

close button to control the display of child
connections. The open/close toggle is not
present if no child connections exist.

Network Color Designations Production network symbols display in green.

Water injection networks display in blue. Gas
injection networks display in red.

350 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Nodes R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Import Network File

You can import an ASCII network file that conforms to the following
VIP® format:

include coupled_bhptable.data
C ##########################################
C # NETWORK DEFINITION #C
##########################################

PIPES
NN NAME DIAMETER THICKNESS ROUGHNESS LENGTH
1 DUM1 30.0 0.65 0 2 !<return>
! Tubing is not required because BHPTABs are
used for hydraulics
! TUBING
! NN NAME DIAMETERTHICKNESSROUGHNESSLENGTHPDCORR
!
NODES
NN NAME PMIN
1 FIELD1 290.0
NODES
NN NAME
2 FIELD2
3 GATHER
4 PLAT
6 WELL1
7 WELL2
! EAST PLATFORM
LINK 1 LINK 1
1 1 BHPTAB 1 0 IBAT -1
LINK 2 LINK 2
1 2 BHPTAB 1 0 IBAT -1
NODCON
NODE OUTCON OUTCNT OUTNOD
FIELD1 DUM1 PIPE FIELD
FIELD2 DUM1 PIPE FIELD
GATHER DUM1 PIPE GATHER
PLAT DUM1 PIPE GATHER
WELL11 3 LINK PLAT
WELL2 4 LINK WELL1
!NODESOURCE
!NODES SRP
! OIL 0
! GAS 0
!WATER 360000

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Nodes 351

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Perform the following steps to import the networkr.dat file, which

contains the network description and node pressure limits and
corresponding temperatures contained in your original master file.

1. Open the file selector. Click the Import File button

located near the bottom of the panel. The File Selection dialog box
opens.

2. Select the file. The dialog box opens, filtered to files of type *r.dat.
Filter to the directory containing the network.dat file. Select the
file and click the OK button. The data defined in your master file
import into the panel.

Importing Subnetworks

Once a network file exists, you will receive the following prompt when you attempt
to import a new one. Select Yes if you want to replace the existing network. If you
select No, the new network will be appended as a subnetwork.

3. Expand the network. Click the Expand button to view

the entire network.

Proceed to the section below if you want to modify the imported

network. Or proceed to “Define Network Properties and Constraints”
on page 358 to continue to the next panel.

Create or Modify Interconnect Network

Perform the following steps to create or modify an interconnect
network.

1. Add a network. Click the Add Network button located near the
bottom of the panel and select the network type to add as shown
below: production, water injection, or gas injection.

352 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Nodes R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

The selected network displays at the bottom of the nodes list in the
designated symbol color. The node is named numerically, in
consecutive order by network type.

2. Modify network settings. Once a network has been added, right-

click on the node name to open the modify pull-down menu as
shown below.

You must right-click over

the icon to open the
menu

This menu lets you perform the following tasks on the selected
node.

Task Description

Add new interconnect node down- Right-click on the node below which
stream you want to add another node. Then
select the option. A child node of the
same type is added, numbered consecu-
tively.

Gaslift Select to add or remove a gaslift source

to the selected wells. You receive a dia-
log box within which you specify the
gas source stream and maximum gas
source injection for the connection.
Refer to “Setting Gaslift Options” on
page 355.

Separator Define new separator or stream splitting

node upstream. For each outflow con-
nection, define the name, connection to
sink, oil/gas/water phase, and rate-split
fraction,

Connect node to reservoir List injector groups for selection.

Change network type Change network from production to

injection, etc.

Delete node from network Right-click on the node and select the
option. You receive the prompt:

Click the OK button to proceed with the

delete. Or click the Cancel button.

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Nodes 353

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Task Description

Delete network branch Click on a node and delete all child

nodes.

Remove node and reconnect down- Click on a node to delete. All child
stream nodes will be connected to the new par-
ent

Rename node Right-click on the node and select the

delete or rename option. The node name
highlights. If you select to delete, the
node is deleted from the network. If you
select to rename, click the backspace
key to remove the node name and re-
enter it.

Terminal node pressure constraints Right-click on the node and select the
option. A dialog box opens. Enter the
minimum pressure and activate any of
the following toggles: apply to all termi-
nal nodes of the same type, overwrite
current value, or specify a date if one
has not been set.

3. Modify pressures or temperature. Click in the Node Pressure

Limits or Node Temperature field. Either enter a value or select
an existing value from the pull-down menu.

Minimum Requirement

You must have a node pressure limit and corresponding temperature assigned to each
top-level node. For production networks this will be the minimum sink pressure. For
injection networks this will be the maximum source pressure. Pressure limits and
temperatures on non-terminal (interior) nodes are optional.

Keyboard Shortcuts

All values you assign subsequently display in a pop-up menu for re-selection. Also,
you can double-click in the field to duplicate the previous entry.

354 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Nodes R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Setting Gaslift Options

Gaslift lets you simulate the most efficient rates by which gas can be
charged into a well to lighten the oil for increased oil production, so
that the production profit can be maximized.

Unlike other optimizers, the Nexus software does not need to assume:

• An optimal gas-lift performance curve for for each well. )

• An optimal gas-lift table or a gas-lift performance curve for each
well.
• Isolated wells.
• A fixed well head pressure.

The optimal gas lift allocation is calculated by an efficient nonlinearly-

constrained optimizer through solving the surface pipeline network,
which is fully coupled with the reservoir solve.

All constraints and targets of the surface pipeline network can be

satisfied from the the Nodes and Connections menus:

1. Create the node and click the right mouse button menu on the
Nodes panel to select gaslift sources.

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Nodes 355

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

2. Complete the data in the Wizard. This will be a two-panel wizard

if you are selecting a group of wells. For the selected wells, choose
either the default gas source stream as specified in with the
CTRLCOND Targeting option or select the node. Then enter the
maximum gas injection rate for the connection.

3. Create a connection list for the gaslift connections you want to put
on automatic gaslift, plus a target with the GASLIFTOPT control

356 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Nodes R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

method for that connection list. Refer to “Targeting Options” on

page 180.

4. Set the gaslift optimization parameters (GLIFTOPT control data).

These are optional as there have some defaults. Refer again to
“Targeting Options” on page 180

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Nodes 357

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Define Network Properties and Constraints

This panels lets you define properties and constraints for each
connection as shown below, or define connection data as described in
“Default Connection Data” on page 364.

Perform the following steps to define the properties and constraints.

1. Select the type. Surface network connections default to the type

Hydraulic Table. Connections from individual reservoirs to the
surface network default to the type Gradient, with a value of 0.
For each connection, click in the Type field to open the pull down
menu as shown below.

358 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Properties and Constraints R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

2. Select the correlation method.

• For type Gradient, enter a value or select the CALC option

from the pull-down menu as shown below.

• If you select the CALC option, the simulator will calculate the
fluid gradient from the fluid conditions in the connection. The
simulator will then calculate the pressure change through the
connection based on the depths of the inlet and outlet nodes
and the input or calculated fluid gradient.

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Properties and Constraints 359
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

• If you select PIPE option, enter the correlation method (note

the warning below).

Update/Warning: New Correlation Methods!

The following correlation methods are now functional: NOSLIP, DUKLER,

DUKEAT, BEGGS, HAGEDORN, DUNROS, AZIZ, ORKISZ, GRIFFITH,
SUPRIB.

The Nexus software does not distinguish between PIPE and TUBING; both are
categorized as PIPE. It is only the angle and inclination of the connection (vertical
PIPE or horizontal/near horizontal PIPE) that is important. The Nexus software
considers wellbores and risers to be steeply-inclined PIPE.

Some correlations are more suitable for horizontal or near horizontal connections
(PIPE devices in the VIP software): NOSLIP, DUKLER, and DUKEAT. Others are
more suitable for vertical or steeply inclined connections (TUBING in the VIP
software): HAGEDORN, DUNROS, AZIZ, ORKISZ, and GRIFFITH. A few, such
as SUPRIB and BEGGS are suitable for both.

You will not receive a warning or error message if you select a correlation method that
was not designed for the inclination of the connection. Be aware that the 'accuracy'
of the model may decline the farther the connection gets from its optimum inclination.

For details of all correlation types except SUPRIB, refer to:

Brill, J.P. and Beggs, H.D., Two-Phase Flow in Pipes, University of Tulsa, Sixth
Edition, January, 1991.

For details of the SUPRIB correlation type, refer to:

Alkaya, B.: “Drift-Flux Models for Multiphase Flow in Wells” M.S. Thesis,
Stanford University, Sept. 2002.

For details of the original work on drift-flux, refer to:

Zuber, N. and Findlay, J. A.: “Average Volumetric Concentration in Two-Phase

Systems, Trans. ASME, J. Heat Transfer (Nov. 1965), Ser. C, vol 87, 453-468.

• For type Hydraulic Tables, select the Add New Method option
from the pull-down menu a shown below.

360 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Properties and Constraints R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

The File Selection dialog box opens, filtered to files of type

*r.dat. Filter to the directory containing the properly-formatted
hydraulic table to import.

Importing and Creating Hydraulic Tables

Note that hydraulic tables can be imported from any files, as long as the tables are in
VIP format. Nexus hydraulic tables may be imported from Nexus case (.fcs) files.

The Table Import Selection dialog box opens.

Note that you can click each table separately to view a plot of
the data. Then highlight the tables to import:

Select All Toggle Click to highlight all the tables for

import

Shift/Click Highlight continuous range for import

Control/Click Highlight noncontinuous tables for

import

When you click the OK button, the tables are imported to the
Method field pull-down menu. Open the pull down menu and
select the table as shown below.

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Properties and Constraints 361
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Method Numbers vs. Table Numbers

The Nexus software assigns a method number to each table in the order in which they
are read. Since these method numbers are not meaningful to the novice user, the
corresponding table number is also shown in the list.

Note: Hydraulics Table Panel

Within the SimDataStudio™ software, you can also create, import and modify
hydraulics tables using the Hydraulics Table panel. Refer to page 368 .

3. Specify the connection properties and rate constraints as described

in the table below:

Parameter Description

Properties
IBAT Default connection separator table number.
(Not used for wellbore connections.)
DIAM Default connection diameters. Only used if
pressure drop correlations are used in a con-
nection. Default: 6 inches for CONNEC-
TION, otherwise 3.5 inches.

INNERDIAM Default connection inner diameters used if

Inner Diameter pressure drop correlations are used in a con-
nection. This is the inner diameter of an annu-
lus, the outer diameter of the inner pipe. Only
used if pressure drop correlations are used in a
connection.(Units inches, or cm)
Default: 0
ROUGHNESS Default connection PVT table numbers. (Not
used for wellbore connections).
Default: 1 for CONNECTION, the PVT
method used by the gridblock for the connect-
ing perforation for the well connections.
HTC (Heat Transfer Heat transfer coefficient for simplified heat
Coefficient) transfer.

TEMPR Temperature at the default connection.

Temperature

362 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Properties and Constraints R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Parameter Description
Constraints
QOMAX, QGMAX, Maximum oil, gas, water, liquid, all, or hydro-
QWMAX, QLIQMAX, carbon rate.
QALLMAX, QHC-
MAX
Maximum rate
QOMIN, QGMIN, Minimum oil, gas, water, liquid, all, or hydro-
QWMIN, QLIQMIN, carbon rate.
QALLMIN, QHCMIN
Minimum rate

QOSMAX, QGSMAX, Maximum surface oil rate for oil, gas, water,
QWSMAX, QLIQ- liquid, all, or hydrocarbon.
MAX, QALLMAX,
QHCMAX
Maximum rate
QOSMIN, QGSMIN, Minimum surface oil rate for oil, gas, water,
QWSMIN, QLIQMIN, liquid, all, or hydrocarbon.
QALLMIN, QHCMIN
Minimum rate
QRESULTMULT
SETTING Specifies a maximum valve setting used when
calculating the pressure drop across a valve,
unless another constraint is violated, in which
case the setting is calculated by the
program.
QFUEL Rate of gas in the connection used as fuel.
FFUEL Fraction of gas rate in connection used as fuel.
Note: If QFUEL and FFUEL both exist as a non-zero value, the total fuel
used is the sum of the two.
QSHRINK Rate of gas for the connection lost to shrink-
age.
FSHRINK Fraction of gas rate for the connection lost to
shrinkage.
Note: If QSHRINK and FSHRINK both exist as a non-zero value, the
total shrinkage is the sum of the two.

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Properties and Constraints 363
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Parameter Description

ALQ Specifies the artificial lift quantity used when

looking up a hydraulics table. It will only have
an effect for hydraulics tables which have
more than one ALQ value specified.
Default: The first alq value in the hydraulics
table.
ACTIVATE/DEACTI- Designates a connection or well as activate or
VATE inactive (well is shut in with no crossflow in
the wellbore).
Default: Connections and wells are active by
default.
CLEAR/CLEARQ/ CLEAR removes the rate and pressure con-
CLEARALL straints for this connection, node or well.
CLEARALL removes the rate and pressure
constraints for all connections, nodes or wells.
CLEARQ removes only the RATE constraints
for this connection.

4. Specify non-well connections. Specify the calculation method,

properties (diameter, inner diameter, roughness, and ontime), and
hydrocarbon and water PVT tables for non-well connections. Non-
well connections could be connections from the bottomhole node
to the wellbore node at the first perforation, connections in the
perforated section of the wellbore, and connections from the
bottom hole node to the rest of the network.

Default Connection Data

The following options allow you to define default connection criteria.

Click the button to open the associated dialog box. Enter the values as
described below.

364 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Properties and Constraints R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Non-Wells, Bottomhole-to- Well, and Well-to-Network

Parameter Type Description

Calculation method • Select the pressure drop fluid gradient
(simulator calculated or user-defined).
• Select the correlation type.
• Select the hydraulic table.
Physical data Enter the following: diameter, inner diameter,
roughness, ontime, and heat transfer coeffi-
cient.
Method for fluid calcu- Select from a menu of valid tables the default
lation hydrocarbon and water PVT method

Wellbore

Parameter Type Description

Calculation method • Select the pressure drop fluid gradient
(simulator calculated or user-defined).
• Select the correlation type.
• Select the hydraulic table.
• Assume fully-mixed fluids for fluid den-
sity gradient calculation (on/off).
• Model wellbore with single node located at
averaged perforation depths
Physical data Enter the following: diameter, inner diameter,
roughness, ontime, and heat transfer coeffi-
cient.
Method for fluid calcu- Select from a menu of valid tables the default
lation hydrocarbon and water PVT method

Datum Correction
Select from the pull-down menu the well bottomhole pressures will be
adjusted to datum:

• (MOBGRAD) mobility weighted reservoir density gradient in

the perforated grid blocks (VIP method)

• (WELLGRAD) density gradient of the fluid flowing in the

bottom hole connection, evaluated at the bottom hole pressure.

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Properties and Constraints 365
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

• (OILGRAD) well bottom hole pressures will be adjusted to

datum using the initial average density gradient of the oil
phase.

• (GASGRAD) well bottom hole pressures will be adjusted to

datum using the initial average density gradient of the gas
phase.

• (WATERGRAD) well bottom hole pressures will be adjusted

to datum using the initial average density gradient of the water
phase.

Crossflow
Click the toggle to activate and deactivate crossflow (not active when
checked). When active, wellbore crossflow is modeled based on the
method of Coats, Modine, and Wells. This method is based on the
superposition of interlayer “crossflow” flow terms that sum to zero and
the “no crossflow” flow terms that are obtained in the conventional
manner by shutting in the backflowing layers.

Heat Transfer / Temperature Adjustment Options

Click the toggle to activate the options (off by default). Density in the
surface network can be adjusted by temperature and/or temperature can
be calculated using a simplified heat transfer option. When the option is
active, input temperatures are ambient. When these options are
inactive, input temperatures are fluid. Click the ellipse button to open
the following for Phase Specific Heat Transfer field to open the
dialog box and specify the oil, gas, and water heat capacity in (BTU/
(lbm*F), J/(kg*K), J/(kg*K), J/(kg*K). The defaults are .53 (oil), .51
(gas), and 1.0 (water).

366 Surface and Interconnect Network: Define Network Properties and Constraints R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

PVT and Hydraulics Data

These panels let you define, view, and edit PVT and hydraulics table
data.
PVT and Hydraulics table panels

You can:

• Import an existing table. (Refer to “Import” on page 368.)

• Create a table by entering the data.

• Create a PVT table using correlation values (Refer to “Create a

Correlation Curve” on page 369.)

• Preview and/or edit the table from a plot. (Refer to “Preview/Edit

the Data from a Plot” on page 370.)

Once created or imported, the data is available under the Method and
IPVT fields for Interconnect Network Connection properties and
constraints.

Method Numbers vs. Table Numbers

The Nexus® software assigns a method number to each table in the order in which
they are read. Since these method numbers are not meaningful to the novice user,
the corresponding table number is also shown in the list.

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: PVT and Hydraulics Data 367
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Import
The table can be imported from a Nexus case file (.fcs) file, a VIP
include file (.inc), or a properly-formatted external text file.

Perform the following steps to import a hydraulics tables.

1. Import the file. Scroll to the bottom of the panel and click the
Import from File button to open the file selection dialog box.
Filter to and select the file containing the hydraulics tables.

The Table Import Selection dialog box opens as shown below.

Note that you can click on any table to preview the data. The
default units and table description display in the entry field for
editing. (Note: change the units value only if it was incorrectly
assigned. This option does not convert between units.)

In the Table Selection list, highlight the tables to import and then
click OK:

• Import All Table toggle - Click to highlight all the tables for
import

368 Surface and Interconnect Network: PVT and Hydraulics Data R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

• Shift/Click - Highlight continuous range for import

• Control/Click - Highlight multiple tables for import

The tables are imported into the panel.

Create a Correlation Curve

For PVT tables, perform the following steps to create a table from
correlation curve input.

1. Open the dialog box. Scroll to the bottom of the panel and click the
Correlation... button to open the Curve Correlation dialog box.

2. Define table parameters. Click in the entry fields and enter values
for the parameters. Note that mandatory fields are shown in red
within the dialog box. Parameters for black oil PVT tables are
described below.

Option Description

API Gravity API gravity of the oil at the gas-oil contact.

GOR Gas-oil ratio at standard conditions (lbm/ft3,
kg/m3, kg/m3, gm/cc)
Gas Gravity Gas-specific gravity (dimensionless)
Temperature Fluid-specific temperature
Separator Temperature Temperature for separator stage
Separator Pressure Pressure for separator stage
Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure
entry

3. Define density/molecular weight. Click in the entry fields under

the Density/Molecular Weight topic and enter the density of the
residual oil at standard conditions and the molecular weight.

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: PVT and Hydraulics Data 369
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

4. Define other options. Click the Other Options button to open a

dialog box showing optional molecular density-related parameters
and click to check any to select.

Preview/Edit the Data from a Plot

Use the options shown below to control the table display, import a new
table, delete an existing table, or edit a table description.

For the currently displayed table, you can display bottomhole pressure
versus gas-oil ratio, water cut, or liquid rates. You can click in the
entry fields to edit the values. Click the Plot Projection toggle to view a
plot of the data. Click and drag a line within the plot to edit the values.

370 Surface and Interconnect Network: PVT and Hydraulics Data R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Simulation Controls
This panel lets you define or modify the timesteps and the related
simulator limits and controls.

Simulation Control Panel

Multi-Reservoir Models

If you imported a multi-reservoir model, the default values are determined by the
selection you made on the Multi-reservoir Wizard. (You chose to either apply to
all reservoirs the simulator controls for the first reservoir you imported, or apply
the most restrictive controls to all reservoirs.)

Perform the following steps to modify the simulation control

parameters:

1. Select the date. In the date list on the right side of the panel, click
to select the date from which the controls will apply. Follow the
subsequent procedure steps to modify the simulator controls that
you want to activate on the active date. Folder icons in the date list
display with a red asterisk when populated with simulation control
changes.
Note that you can modify the date list. Click MB3 on a date to add
a new date or delete the selected one.

2. Modify timestep control. Click the ellipse button located next to

the Time Step Control field. The Timestep Control Selection

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: PVT and Hydraulics Data 371
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

dialog box opens. You can change the timestep size and maximum
change allowed during the timestep.

Typically, you would leave the default Automatic control to let the
program select the timestep size within the following constraints
that you enter the following maximum timestep increases:
allowed, allowed after activation of a production connection, and
allowed after activation of an injection connection. (The
specialized Skip Time Step Size Adjustment parameter is not
typically used.)

3. Select scope. The Control Scope column lists All Grids by default.
Some input parameters can be specified by individual grids or
individual fields in a multi-field model. If applicable, select the
grid or field for which you want to apply different controls.

4. Select time stepping method. Click the toggle to select whether the
solver should use IMPES or Implicit formulation.

5. Select maximum mass/mole fraction. Click the toggle to define the

maximum change of fraction of mass for a single component. For
example, if the value you specify is .5 and the values for the cell at
the start of the timestep are .4 oil, .3 gas, and .2 water, at the end of
the timestep, the oil rate will be as close to .5 as possible.

6. Select grid solver options. Click the ellipse button beside the Grid
Solver options column to open the Grid Solvers Parameters dialog
box. For both the Impes or Implicit method, you can define:

Option Description

Facility grid coupling grid Options are no modification, nested factoriza-

matrix modification tion rowsum, and nested factorization
method colsum
Pre-conditioner for full Options are Gauss Seidel (symmetric point
Implicit set of equations Gauss Seidel) or Does the Elimination Exactly
Where it is Convenient (half fast). Default:
Gauss Seidel
L2 norm reduction criteria Required 2 norm reduction. Default is 0.03 for
the CPR pressure solve, 0.01 for
the grid in multi-grid solve, and 0 for the CPR
Implicit solve.

372 Surface and Interconnect Network: PVT and Hydraulics Data R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

7. Select IMPES stability criteria. If you have selected IMPES

formulation, these options let you control simulator treatment of
IMPES stability restrictions.

By default, the simulator calculates the maximum timestep size for

which IMPES is a stable formulation (based on volumetric and
molar throughput) and forces the timestep to be no larger than this
value. Click the ellipse button beside the IMPES Stability
column to open the dialog box.

You can define:

Option Description

Activation The default is to activate the values you define,

Once defined, click the Ignore
toggle to deactivate the defined settings.
Timestep Constraints Fraction of the maximum stable IMPES time
step to use as the target for each calculation
of time step size. Default is 0.9.

Largest fraction of the maximum stable IMPES

time step at which the simulator is
permitted to run. Default is 1.0.

On a single time step, maximum number of

time step reductions due to violation of
the above-described limit on a single time step.
Default is 3.
Type of Constraints Check Ignore violations of largest fraction of
maximum stable IMPES time step at
which the simulator is permitted to run. Default
is OFF.

Check flow both into and out of blocks is to be

checked for stability. Default is
to only check the flow out of blocks.

Type of stability criteria to use, Coats or Peace-

man,

Maximum rate of change in global tolerances

for time step control at which to skip
the calculation.

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: PVT and Hydraulics Data 373
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

8. Limit on Rate. Set maximum rate of GOR increase. Click the

ellipse button under the Limit on Rate column. A dialog box
opens to let you enter a limit on the rate of solution gas-oil ratio.
You can also specify that this limit will apply only to gridblocks
that have both an oil and a gas phase.

374 Surface and Interconnect Network: PVT and Hydraulics Data R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Valve and Choke Data

This panel lets you define different valve settings for smart wells that
can be triggered during the simulation.

Valve Data Panel

Import Valve and Choke Definitions

You can import valve and choke tables from a VIP-formatted include
file (.inc), a Nexus case file (.fcs), or a properly formatted text file.
Perform the following steps to import valve and choke tables.

1. Import the file. Scroll to the bottom of the panel and click the
Import from File button to open the file selection dialog box. Filter
to and select the file containing the valve and choke table.

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: Valve and Choke Data 375
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Define Multiple Settings

The Region Management option shown below let you set up and access
multiple valve and choke setting definitions.

Select the Add New Valve Method option on the Region Management
menu to add a new method. Then use the steppers or menu options to
select the method to define.

Define the Valve or Choke Method

Perform the following steps to define a valve or choke method. Note:
If you are defining multiple methods, make sure you have selected the
correct one on the Region Management bar.

1. Define method. Click the Valve or Choke toggle to identify the

type of method you are defining.

2. Define rate type for pressure drop (valve only). Click the Rate
Type toggle to activate which fluid is to be used to determine the
pressure drop across the valve: oil, gas, water, liquid, or total
mass.

3. Complete the table. Enter the setting numbers in the Setting field
and the corresponding valve coefficient (VC) or choke inner
diameter (ID).

VC: Setting values must be monotonically increasing. VC values

must be monotonically decreasing. The valve coefficient uses the
Valvec valve model to predict subcritical pressure drop across a
valve using the equation:

Pout - Pin = -vc(setting) * Qtot * |Qtot| \ ρ

where:

Pout is the pressure at the outlet of the valve

Pin is the pressure at the inlet of the valve
Qtot is the total mass rate of the fluid in lb/sec, kg/sec or gm/sec

376 Surface and Interconnect Network: Valve and Choke Data R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

ρ is the mixture density

vc(setting) is the valve coefficient, which depends on the setting

ID: ID = 0 indicates no flow.

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: Valve and Choke Data 377
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Valve Trigger Data

This panel displays all smart wells defined in Well Planner. They are
used by Procedures WELL_VALVE and SET_VALVE_SETTING.
The procedures open, close or adjust the valve setting for the
connection or well if the trigger is exceeded.
Valve Trigger Panel

You can use the Valve Triggers panel to create the WELL_VALVE and
SET_VALVE_SETTING procedures table if the valve is below the
wellhead. If the valve is above the wellhead, you must create the
Procedures table manually as defined in the “Procedures chapter” of
the Nexus Keyword Document:

Parameter Description

WELL_VALVE The number of wells for which a down-

hole valve setting has been changed.
SET_VALVE_SETTING The number of connections for which
the valve setting has been changed.

378 Surface and Interconnect Network: Valve Trigger Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

For the selected DATE card, the following parameters may be set to
control smart well valves. The default for all values is huge. If a well
exceeds one of the parameters specified for that well, the Nexus
software will determine which of the well’s valve connections is the
worst offender and perform the appropriate action on that valve
connection. The possible actions are to ‘close’ the valve connection or
to set a ‘target’ constraint for the valve connection.

Parameter Description

GOR Gas-oil ratio

WCUT Water cut
WOR Water-oil ratio
WGR Water-gas ratio
QO Oil rate
QG Gas rate
QW Water rate
Action Close or Adjust
Action Value If adjust is selected, the value to be used
to make the adjustment

R5000.0.1 Surface and Interconnect Network: Valve Trigger Data 379

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

380 Surface and Interconnect Network: Valve Trigger Data R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Time-Dependent Grid Data

Introduction

Data Management and Selection

Data Management and Selection options lets you add and delete from
the list array definitions that can be defined by array name and I,J, K
grid range.

Delete selected function Move down function list

Add function Move up function list

Add an Array Name and Range

Click the icon to add a new line to the list.

Delete Array Name and Range

Click and highlight the line in the list. Then click the icon to delete
the selected line.

Move between Lines

Click and highlight a line in the list. Then click the and icons to
move within the defined list.

R5000.0.1 Time-Dependent Grid Data: Introduction 381

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Input Array Modification

This panel lets you modify over time the cell-to-cell transmissibility
(ITRAN), saturation (ISAT), imbibition saturation (ISATI), and
transmissibility for named faults.

Data is imported or entered in VIP® format using in the same manner as the
VIP OVER/VOVER or FTRAN options.

Procedures for modifying input arrays are described.

Procedures
Perform the following steps to to complete the Array Modification
panel.

1. Define array. Click in the Array field and select the array name
from the pull down menu.

2. Define the gridblock range. Click in the To/From fields to define

the I, J, K gridblock range to limit the function by I, J, K range.
Click the up or down stepper arrow to define the range over which
the function is applied.

382 Time-Dependent Grid Data: Input Array Modification R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

3. Define the action. Click and select the modification action from
the pull-down menu: add, subtract, multiply, or divide.

4. Define the value. Click in the entry field and enter the value
associated with the action (i.e., an action of multiply with a value
of 2 will multiply all the values within the defined range by 2).

5. Define the format for the value. These options are defined as follows:

• The Single Value option lets you enter a single modifier in the
Value field. This modifier is applied to the grid cell range by
the specified operator.

• The All Values option opens a dialog box in the Value field
and lets you enter modifiers for each grid cell in the range. These
modifiers are applied by the specified operator.

• The Include File option is the same as the Single Value

option, except that you can import the modifier from an
include file.

• The All Values in Include File option is the same as the All
Values option, except that you can import the modifiers from
an include file.

Include files

The include file data can provide OVER/VOVER values (for standard,
unfaulted grids) or FTRANS values (for faulted grids) but a single include
file cannot mix the two types of keyword values.

6. Define the effective date. Click in the Effective Date field to

specify the effective date for the modification. The default value is
the beginning date for the property. Click the down arrow by the
default date to open a Calender dialog box and select an alternate
date.

R5000.0.1 Time-Dependent Grid Data: Input Array Modification 383

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Arbitrary Gridblock Connections

When using the standard fault option this panel lets you specify non-
cornerpoint connections between gridblocks and the transmissibility
between two blocks connected as the result of a named fault

Data is imported or entered in VIP format using in the same manner as the
VIP FLT option.

Procedures for defining arbitrary gridblock connections are described.

Procedures
Perform the following steps to define arbitrary gridblock connections.

1. Define the gridblock range. Click in the To/From fields to limit

the function by I, J, K range. Click the up or down stepper arrow to
define the range over which the function is applied.

2. Select the grid. Click the Grid field and select the active grid for
which the connections are to be made.

384 Time-Dependent Grid Data: Arbitrary Gridblock Connections R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

3. Define the value. If Single Value format is selected, click in the

entry field and enter the value. If the Include File value format is
selected, a File Selection dialog box opens when you click in the
Value field.

4. Define the format for the value. The Single Value option applies a
constant arithmetic operation to the specified portion of the grid
system. It modifies the immediately preceding array data.

When the Include File value format is selected, a File Selection

dialog box opens when you click in the Value field.

5. Define the effective date. Click in the Effective Date field to

specify the effective date for the modification. The default value is
the beginning date for the property. Click the down arrow by the
default date to open a Calender dialog box and select an alternate
date.

R5000.0.1 Time-Dependent Grid Data: Arbitrary Gridblock Connections 385

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Inter/Intra Gridblock Region Transmissibility

Multipliers

This panel displays the named transmissibility regions and lets you
assign a multiplier to modify transmissibilities between and within
gridblocks over time. Both standard and non-standard connections can
be multiplied.

Data is imported or entered in VIP format using in the same manner as

the VIP MULTIR and corresponding PTHLD options. Flow across any
interface connection will not occur until the phase potential difference
across the connection exceeds the threshold pressure. The phase
potential difference to flow will be reduced by the threshold pressure.

Procedures for modifying transmissibility multipliers are described.

386 Time-Dependent Grid Data: Inter/Intra Gridblock Region Transmissibility Multipliers R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Procedures
Perform the following steps to define inter/intra gridblock region
transmissibility multipliers.

1. Select the transmissibility region from which the multiplier is to be

applied . Click on the transmissibility region from which you want
to assign the multiplier. The line highlights.

2. Select the transmissibility region to which the multiplier is to be

applied . If it is not displayed by default, click in the entry field
and enter the region to which you want to assign the multiplier.

3. Enter the multiplier. Click in the Multiplier entry field and enter
the multiplier value.

4. Select the direction. Click in the Direction field and select the
multiplier direction from the pull-down menu: X, Y, Z, or both X
and Y.

5. Select the connection type. Click in the Connect Type field and
specify whether you want the multiplier applied only to standard
connections, only to non-standard connections, or all connections
within the region.

6. Define the effective date. Click in the Effective Date field to

specify the effective date for the modifier. The default value is the
beginning date for the property. Click the down arrow by the
default date to open a Calender dialog box and select an alternate
date.

7. Enter a description (option). Click in the Description entry field

and enter an optional description for the multiplier.

R5000.0.1 Time-Dependent Grid Data: Inter/Intra Gridblock Region Transmissibility Multipliers 387
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Named Fault Multipliers

This panel displays named faults that intersect the grid and lets you
assign fault multipliers to change the transmissibility of the fault over
time.

Data is imported or entered in VIP format using in the same manner as

the VIP MULTFL option.

Multiplier values range from zero to one:

Value Description
0 sealed
1 fully conductive
decimal value between 0 and 1 partial transmissibility value

388 Time-Dependent Grid Data: Named Fault Multipliers R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Procedures for entering fault transmissibilities are described below.

Alternate Method for Assigning Pressure Dependent Faults

Optionally, the PTHLD keyword lets you assign gridblock to gridblock flow
based on calculated pressure threshold. Refer to the “Interface Pressure
Threshold” on page 390.

Procedures
Perform the following steps to assign fault multipliers.

1. Display the fault list. Click the Check Fault Name List button
located near the bottom of the panel. A list of all faults that
intersect the active grid displays in the Fault Name list.

2. Select the date. Click on the effective start date in the Date/Time
card column on the right of the panel. This is the date from which
the multiplier value will be active for the fault.

3. Select the fault. Click the fault name for which you want to change
the multiplier value. The row highlights and the associated Fault
Multiplier field activates.

4. Enter the multiplier value for the fault. Click in the Fault
Multiplier field for the selected fault and enter a value of zero
(sealed), 1 (fully conductive), or an intermediate decimal value
indicating partial transmissibility.

R5000.0.1 Time-Dependent Grid Data: Named Fault Multipliers 389

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Interface Pressure Threshold

This panel lets you limit the pressure threshold for a named fault or
between transmissibility regions of a fault. Flow across any interface
connection will not occur until the phase potential difference across the
connection exceeds the threshold pressure. The phase potential difference to
flow will be reduced by the threshold pressure.

Data is imported or entered in VIP format using in the same manner as

the VIP PTHLD option.

Procedures for limiting pressure thresholds are described.

Procedures
Perform the following steps to limit the pressure threshold.

1. Display the fault list and transmissibility regions. The data stored
in the VDB displays automatically in the panel. Click the Check

390 Time-Dependent Grid Data: Interface Pressure Threshold R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Fault Name List and Check Transmissibility Regions buttons

located near the bottom of the panel if you need to update the lists.

2. Select the date. Click on the effective start date in the Date/Time
card column on the right of the panel. This is the date from which
the multiplier value will be active for the fault.

3. Select the fault. Click the fault name for which you want to define
the the pressure threshold. The row highlights and the assigned
transmissibility regions for the fault display.

4. Assign the pressure threshold. You can assign the pressure

threshold either to the entire fault or between specific
transmissibility regions. Click in the Pressure Threshold entry
field for either the fault (left panel) or region interface (right panel)
and enter the value.

R5000.0.1 Time-Dependent Grid Data: Interface Pressure Threshold 391

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

392 Time-Dependent Grid Data: Interface Pressure Threshold R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Simulation Control

Introduction

This panel lets you define or modify the timesteps and the related
simulator limits and controls.

Multi-reservoir models

If you imported a multi-reservoir model, the default values are determined by the
selection you made on the Mult-reservoir Wizard. (You chose either to apply to
all reservoirs the simulator controls for the first reservoir you imported or to apply
the most restrictive controls to all reservoirs.)

R5000.0.1 Simulation Control: Introduction 393

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

Procedures

Perform the following steps to modify the simulation control

parameters:

Define Timestep Method

Click the icon beside the Time Step Control field to open the dialog
box as shown below.

1. Select timestep controls. The default is automatic size control.

Typically, you would leave the default Automatic control to let the
program select the timestep size. Optionally, you can define a
constant time step size.

You can define the maximum timestep change based on number of

days. Specific timestep changes can be defined for the activation
of a production or injection subnetwork connection.

You can also define the number of timesteps for which to skip the
size adjustment. (The specialized Skip Time Step Size Adjustment
parameter is not typically used.)

394 Simulation Control: Procedures R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Define Controls
2. Select the date. In the date list on the right side of the panel, click
to select the date from which the controls will apply. The active
folder icon displays as open . Follow the subsequent procedure
steps to modify the simulator controls that you want to activate on
the selected date. Folder icons in the date list display with a red
asterisk when populated with simulation control changes.

3. Define the scope for the specified simulation controls. The Control
Scope column lists All Grids by default. Some input parameters
can be specified by individual grids or individual fields in a multi-
field model. If applicable, select the grid or field for which you
want to apply different controls.

4. Select time stepping method. Click the toggle to select whether the
solver should use IMPES or Implicit formulation. If you toggle the
Impes method off, the Implicit method will be used.

5. Select maximum mass/mole fraction. Click the icon open a dialog

box to to define the maximum change of fraction of mass for a
single component. For example, if the value you specify is .5 and
the values for the cell at the start of the timestep are .4 oil, .3 gas,
and .2 water, at the end of the timestep, the oil rate will be as close
to .5 as possible.

6. Select grid solver options. Click the ellipse button beside the
Grid Solver options column to open the Grid Solvers Parameters
dialog box. For both the Impes or Implicit method, you can
define:

• Facility grid coupling grid matrix modification method.

Options are no modification, nested factorization rowsum, and
nested factorization colsum.

• Pre-conditioner for full Implicit set of equations. Options are

Gauss Seidel (symmetric point Gauss Seidel) or Does the
Elimination Exactly Where it is Convenient (half fast)
Default: Gauss Seidel.

• L2 norm reduction criteria. A 2 norm reduction is required.

The default is 0.03 for the CPR pressure solve, 0.01 for the grid
in multi-grid solve, and 0 for the CPR Implicit solve.

7. Select IMPES stability criteria. If you have selected IMPES

formulation, these options let you control simulator treatment of

R5000.0.1 Simulation Control: Procedures 395

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

IMPES stability restrictions. By default, the simulator calculates

the maximum timestep size for which IMPES is a stable
formulation (based on volumetric and molar throughput) and
forces the timestep to be no larger than this value.

Click the ellipse button beside the IMPES Stability column to

open the dialog box. You can define.

• Activation. The default is to activate the values you define,

Once defined, click the Ignore toggle to deactivate the defined
settings.

• Timestep Constraints. Fraction of the maximum stable IMPES

time step to use as the target for each calculation of time step
size. Default is 0.9.

• Largest fraction of the maximum stable IMPES time step at

which the simulator is permitted to run. Default is 1.0. On a
single time step, maximum number of time step reductions due
to violation of the above-described limit on a single time step.
Default is 3.

• Type of checks. Check Ignore violations of largest fraction of

maximum stable IMPES time step at which the simulator is
permitted to run. Default is OFF. Check flow both into and out
of blocks is to be checked for stability. Default i to only check
the flow out of blocks.

• Type of stability criteria to use, Coats or Peaceman,

• Maximum rate of change in global tolerances for time step

control at which to skip the calculation.

8. Set the rate limit. Set maximum rate of GOR increase. Click the
ellipse button under the Limit on Rate column. A dialog box
opens to let you enter a limit on the rate of solution gas-oil ratio.
You can also specify that this limit will apply only to gridblocks
that have both an oil and a gas phase.

396 Simulation Control: Procedures R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Defining External Include Data for

Network and Control Options

Introduction

External include panels are available for network, and control option
data. These panels let you import or enter additional keyword
command not those currently recognized by the SimDataStudio™
software.

R5000.0.1 Defining External Include Data for Network and Control Options: Introduction 397
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

There are two ways to add external include data. You can specify an
external file. Or you can key the information directly into the panel.
Both options are described.

Warning - Data placed at beginning of section

Include data is placed at the beginning of the section. Any data dependencies
within the section must be performed by editing the data file directly.

398 Defining External Include Data for Network and Control Options: Introduction R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Include Files

This option lets you attach external include files to the current
simulation file.

Key commands to manage the file list are shown below.

Delete selected line Move up a line
Add line Move down a
line

Perform the following steps to attach external files:

1. Add a line. Click the Add Line button as shown above. A line is
added to the list.

2. Open the dialog box. Click the button located beside the line.
The File Selection dialog box opens.

3. Select the include file. Filter and select the include file to add.
Click the Open button to close the dialog box when the file is
selected.

4. View the include file. Click the button located at

the bottom of the pane to view the include file. The file displays in
the lower portion of the window a shown below.

Include file tab

When you regenerate the file, an include statement is added to the data
file at the beginning of the selected section of the Nexus® file as shown
below.

Include statement within Grid

section of file

R5000.0.1 Defining External Include Data for Network and Control Options: Include Files 399
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

When you have multiple include files, you can view the contents of any
file by clicking on the file name and clicking the . The
name of the currently open include file displays on the Include File tab.

You can also use the right mouse button menu in the include file
display area as shown below.

These options let you:

• Open include file. This open opens the File Selection dialog box
and displays the contents of the selected file.

• Close include file. Closes the currently displayed file.

• Save include file as. Opens the File Save dialog box to let you save
the file under a new name.

• Find. Opens the Find dialog box to let you search the file for a
particular search string.

400 Defining External Include Data for Network and Control Options: Include Files R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

External Data

This option lets you enter keywords data directly onto the panel to be
written into the current Nexus file.

One command procedure per section

Note that you must perform the procedure separately for commands within
different sections of the Nexus file.

Perform the following steps to type in simulator keyword commands.

1. Type in the command. Click in the entry field as shown below and
type the keyword command(s). Your entry must conform to all
simulator format requirements in order to be valid. SimDataStudio
cannot perform validity checks on your entries.

2. Update external data. When the command has been entered, click
the button located at the bottom of the pane. The
command is added to the buffer and the screen clears. You can
perform another command procedure.

When you regenerate the file, the commands are added directly to the
data file at the beginning of the selected section as shown below.

Keyword command within

Grid section of file

R5000.0.1 Defining External Include Data for Network and Control Options: External Data 401
Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

402 Defining External Include Data for Network and Control Options: External Data R5000.0.1
Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

Index

A connection across pinchout and fault tolerances 95

constraints
aquifers viewing and editing 332
Carter-Tracey Algorithm 212 CORE
definition 209 create dataset using the Assistant 21
Fetkovich algorithm 215 cut, copy, paste cells 300
area
definition of 169
arrays D
advanced reservoir model 154
data
defining 148
averaging 263
definition arrays 150
data files
functions for array definition 155
closing 28
importing 146
creating new 25
physical properties arrays 151
saving 27
region arrays 152
understanding 25
saturation Table Endpoint 153
dates
thermal 153
changing the date list 286
transmissibility Multiplier 153
of perforations 324
transmissibility/Pore Volume Modifications 153
setting preferences for 38
user-specified Initialization 153
setting up the date list 280
using the Roadmap 146
Dates Summary worksheet 278
averaging data 263
default color and line widths
setting 40
B dimension data
specifying (CORE) 87
barriers for low pore-volume gridblocks 95
black-oil table monotonicity (deactivate) 102
bottomhole pressure E
specifying 338, 339, 340, 341
effective dates
for wells 295
C of perforations 324
EOS fluid properties 137
case files component properties 141
existing 24 labeling 141
saving and closing 24 phase transition 139
chart properties existing case 24
changing 258 external data
charts entering 401
production data 256
closing a case 24
colors F
setting 40
field
common well IDs 299
definition of 169

R5000.0.1 Index 403

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

flow rate M
specifying 338
flow station MAP Options (CORE) 76
definition of 169 MAP options (EXEC) 279
fluid model MAPOUT options (EXEC) 283
defining 73
types of 72 O
functions for array definition
defining 157 offband connections 95
limiting range 163 OILGRAD 366
functions for array definitions opening an existing case 24
defining 155 OpenWorks
importing production data 221
output 280
G output data options
gas injector composition setting 46, 49, 53, 56, 58
specifying as a constraint 340 output regions (CORE) 83
GASGRAD 366
gathering center P
definition of 169
graphs parse
production data 256 existing dataset 23
grid system unrecognized data 23
creating LGRs 64 perforation
defining 63 data types 305
including GridGenr files 62 perforations
adding columns to worksheet 325
adding to well 327
H adding to worksheet 326
hydrocarbon compressibility checking (deactivate) 102 deleting 328, 329
effective dates 324
setting up a list 306
I PLOT options (EXEC) 279, 283
preferences
I/J location 295
setting 37
importing production data 219
pressure
INCLUDE files
specifying 338
attaching 399
PRINT options (CORE) 79
initialization
PRINT options (EXEC) 278, 282
algorithm 92
production data
equilibrium 91
averaging 263
non-equilibrium 92
charts 256
vertical 94
importing 219
Introduction 59
importing from OpenWorks 221
Production Data worksheet 250
L clearing 274
Properties 151
line widths PVT interpolation (activate) 102
setting 40
local grid refinement 296, 305
R
region data
fluid property 129

404 Index R5000.0.1

Landmark Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide

rock property 122 W

regions
defining and managing 113 WATERGRAD 366
reservoir constants well constraints
water 86 viewing and editing 332
Restart option 289 well management hierarchy 169
Well Names and Locations worksheet 295
Well Perforations worksheet 305
S well type
specifying 336
saving a case 24
wells
separator batteries 142
adding a new well 301
sorting columns 300
adding perforations 327
specifying EXEC output 280
changing well list 300
standard pressure 87
defining common IDs 299
standard temperature 87
deleting 302
start date
effective dates 295
adjusting 238
setting up well list 297
status bar
Wells Dates worksheet 332
controlling display of 30
worksheet
switchovers
cut, copy, paste 300
working 260
worksheets
adding columns 325
T Dates Summary 278
Production Data 250
tables Well Names and Locations 295
editing 120 Well Perforations 305
importing 119 Wells Dates 332
target
conditions 186
connection lists 186
constraints 183
guide rate 186
rate 183
toolbars
changing location of 29
controlling display of 30
creating new 33
customizing 31
resetting or deleting 33

U
units
setting preferences for 38
unrecognized data 23
user options
setting colors and line widths 40
setting output data 46, 49, 53, 56, 58
user preferences
setting 37

R5000.0.1 Index 405

Nexus® SimDataStudio™ User Guide Landmark

406 Index R5000.0.1